WR161100NA Weather-Rite TT Manual .book

NOT FOR RESIDENTIAL USEWeather-Rite 1100 Seven Mile Road NWComstock Park, MI 49321Telephone: +1.612.338.1401Fax: +1.616.784.0435

www.weather-rite.com

��

��

�� !��"��!�� !�� !� �"�� !��

Installer

Please take the time to read and understand

these instructions prior to any installation.

Installer must give a copy of this manual to the owner.

Owner

Keep this manual in a safe place in order to provide

your service technician with necessary information.

© 2019 Specified Air Solutions

WARNING

FOR YOUR SAFETYIf you smell gas: 1. Open windows. 2. DO NOT try to light any appliance. 3. DO NOT use electrical switches. 4. DO NOT use any telephone in your building. 5. Extinguish any open flame. 6. Leave the building. 7. Immediately call your local fuel supplier after leaving the building. Follow the fuel supplier’s instructions. 8. If you cannot reach your fuel supplier, call the Fire Department.

Fire Hazard

Keep all flammable objects, liquids and vapors the minimum required clear-ances to combustibles away from equipment.

Some objects will catch fire or explode when placed close to equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, injury or property damage.

TT-SeriesDirect, Gas Fired,

Industrial Air HandlerInstallation, Operation &

Service ManualTT112TT115TT118TT212TT215TT218

TT221TT224TT230TT233TT236

P/N WR161100NA Rev D 07/19

Conçus pour les applications non-résidentiellesWeather-Rite1100 Seven Mile Road NWComstock Park, MI 49321Téléphone: +1.612.338.1401Fax: +1.616.784.0435Numéro sans fraís: 800.589.3691


��

�� !��"��"�� "�#$

�� %��&�� %�� %��"�� %��'��"( �� $�� %�� )�� $

��

��

��

*��

��

��


AVERTISSEMENT

POUR VOTRE SECURITESi vous sentez une odeur de gaz:

1. Ouvrir les fenêtres.2. N’essayer pas d’allumer un appareil.3. N’utiliser pas d’interrupteurs électriques.4. N’utiliser pas de téléphone dans votre bâtiment.5. Eteindre flamme nue.6. Quitter le bâtiment.7. Après avoir quitté le bâtiment, appelez immédiatement votre fournisseur local de gaz. Suivre les instructions du fournisseur de gaz.8. Si vous ne pouvez pas joindre votre fournisseur de gaz, appeler le service d’incendie.

Risque d’incendie

Garder tous les objets, liquides ou vapeurs inflammables à la distance minimale de l’unité de chauffage requise avec les matériaux combustibles.

Certains objets prendront feu ou exploseront s’ils sont placés à proximité de l’unité de chauffage.

Le non respect de ces instructions peut entraîner la mort, des blessures corporelles ou des dommages matériels.

TT-SeriesL’appareil de traitment de l’air àcombustion directe, au gaz pour

les applications industriellesManuel d'installation,

d'opération, et d'entretien

TT112TT115TT118TT212TT215TT218

TT221TT224TT230TT233TT236

P/N WR161100NA Rev C 04/18


Specified Air Solutions.

TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION 1: Air Handler Safety.............................................. 1

1.1 Description of Operation............................................... 1

1.2 Inspection and Setup ................................................... 1

1.3 Safety Labels and Their Placement ............................. 2

1.4 California Proposition 65 .............................................. 2

1.5 Label Placement .......................................................... 2

SECTION 2: Installer Responsibility .....................................82.1 Corrosive Chemicals.................................................... 8

2.2 Required Equipment .................................................... 8

SECTION 3: Critical Considerations ................................... 103.1 Required Clearances to Combustibles....................... 10

3.2 Purge of Supply Duct ................................................. 10

3.3 Hardware ................................................................... 10

SECTION 4: National Standards and Applicable Codes ... 114.1 Fuel Codes................................................................. 11

4.2 Installation Codes ...................................................... 11

4.3 Aircraft Hangars ......................................................... 11

4.4 Parking Structures and Repair Garages .................... 11

4.5 Electrical .................................................................... 11

4.6 Venting....................................................................... 11

4.7 High Altitude .............................................................. 11

SECTION 5: Specifications .................................................. 12SECTION 6: Lifting an Air Handler ...................................... 27

6.1 Lifting an Air Handler ................................................. 27

SECTION 7: Air Handler Assembly...................................... 30SECTION 8: VIBRATION ISOLATION ................................... 33

8.1 Pad Isolator for Curb-Mounted Air Handler................ 33

8.2 Neoprene or Spring Isolators for Hanging-Mounted

Air Handler................................................................. 35

8.3 Neoprene or Spring Isolators for Pad-Mounted Air

Handlers.................................................................................. 39

SECTION 9: Roof Curb ......................................................... 479.1 Roof Curb Assembly and Installation......................... 47

9.2 Air Handler Mounting to Roof Curb............................ 49

SECTION 10: Upright Stand ................................................. 5010.1 Upright Stand ........................................................... 50

10.2 Upright Stand Installation......................................... 50

10.3 Attaching Air Handler to Stand................................. 50

SECTION 11: Vertical mounting Legs ................................. 5511.1 Attaching Legs to Air Handler ................................... 55

11.2 Attaching Legs to Slab.............................................. 55

SECTION 12: Filter Section .................................................. 5712.1 Filter Section Installation - Horizontal Air Handlers ..58

12.2 Filter Section Installation - Upright Air Handlers ...... 59

SECTION 13: Inlet Hoods ..................................................... 6013.1 Inlet Hood Installation (Models TT112 - TT215) ....... 61

13.2 Inlet Hood Assembly (Models TT218 and TT221) ... 62

13.3 Inlet Hood Installation (Models TT224 and TT230) .63

13.4 Inlet Hood Installation (Models TT233 and TT236) .67

SECTION 14: Service Platform............................................. 68

SECTION 15: Dampers ......................................................... 7015.1 Discharge Damper Installation................................. 70

15.2 Inlet Damper Installation.......................................... 71

SECTION 16: Discharge plenum and Discharge Louvers. 7316.1 Four-Way Discharge Plenum Installation ................. 73

16.2 Double Deflection Discharge Louver Installation ......74

SECTION 17: Duct Considerations .................................... 7517.1 Inlet Air Duct............................................................. 76

17.2 Return Air Duct......................................................... 76

17.3 Discharge Duct Work ............................................... 76

SECTION 18: Gas Piping...................................................... 7718.1 Gas Manifolds.......................................................... 77

18.2 Gas Piping and Pressures ....................................... 77

18.3 Gas Manifold Venting............................................... 78

18.4 Gas Piping ............................................................... 83

18.5 Pressure Test Ports.................................................. 83

18.6 Line Pressure Test - Leak Testing............................ 84

SECTION 19: Electrical......................................................... 8519.1 Wiring and Electrical Connections ........................... 85

19.2 Remote Panel .......................................................... 85

19.3 Motor Current Draw ................................................. 85

19.4 Control Current Draw ............................................... 85

19.5 Safety Systems........................................................ 86

SECTION 20: Sequence of Operation ................................. 8720.1 Air Handler Configuration ........................................ 87

20.2 Remote Panel Options............................................. 88

20.3 Basic Sequence of Operation.................................. 90

20.4 Flame Control .......................................................... 90

20.5 Air Volume Control Options ..................................... 99

20.6 Night Setback Options............................................101

20.7 Other Control Options............................................ 102

SECTION 21: Temperature Controls ................................. 10421.1 System Overview For All Series............................. 104

SECTION 22: Direct Fired Burner ...................................... 10822.1 Direct Fired Burner Ignition.................................... 109

22.2 Direct Fired Burner Flame Proving (Flame Rod) ....110

22.3 Direct Fired Burner Flame Proving

(Ultra Violet Scanner) ............................................. 111

SECTION 23: Direct fired process air heaters...................11223.1 Direct Fired Process Air Heater Models..................113

23.2 Installer's Responsibilities ......................................113

23.3 Installer's Responsibility for Process Heaters

Connected to Paint Booths .....................................114

23.4 WEATHER-RITE™ Control Packages .....................115

SECTION 24: Start-up Procedures .................................... 12224.1 Installation of Recirculating Air Handler................. 123

24.2 Mechanical ............................................................ 123

24.3 Electrical ................................................................ 124

24.4 Airflow .................................................................... 124

24.5 Gas Piping and Initial Pressure Settings................ 127

Printed in U.S.A.

24.6 Safety Shut Off Valve Check ..................................131

24.7 Air Volume Control .................................................131

SECTION 25: Maintenance .................................................13325.1 General ..................................................................134

25.2 Unit Exterior ...........................................................134

25.3 Blower Section .......................................................135

25.4 Motor and Drive Components ................................137

25.5 Supply Blower ........................................................138

25.6 Manifold and Controls ............................................138

25.7 Burner ....................................................................139

SECTION 26: Replacement Parts.......................................14126.1 Replacement Blower Components.........................141

26.2 Damper Components.............................................147

26.3 Burner Components...............................................148

26.4 Manifold Components ...........................................149

26.5 Combustion Components ......................................149

26.6 Electrical Components ...........................................151

26.7 Miscellaneous Mechanical Components................154

SECTION 27: Troubleshooting ...........................................15627.1 Initial Checks ..........................................................157

27.2 Supply Fan..............................................................157

27.3 Burner.....................................................................158

27.4 Temperature Controls .............................................159

27.5 Series 14 - Preliminary Circuit Analysis ..................159



27.8 Series MP - Trouble Shooting .................................172

27.9 Flame® Safeguard...................................................186

27.10 WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series Start-Up Procedure.191

SECTION 28: The WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series Warranty.195

SECTION 1: AIR HANDLER SAFETY

1 of 198

SECTION 1: AIR HANDLER SAFETYYour Safety Is Important To Us!

This symbol is used throughout

the manual to notify you of

possible fire, electrical or burn

hazards. Please pay special

attention when reading and

following the warnings in these

sections. Installation, service and,

at a minimum, annual inspection of air handlers must

be done by a contractor qualified in the installation

and service of gas-fired heating equipment.

Read this manual carefully before installation,

operation or service of this equipment.

This air handler is designed for heating non-

residential indoor spaces. Do not install in residential

spaces. These instructions, the layout drawing, local

codes and ordinances and applicable standards that

apply to gas piping (where applicable), electrical

wiring, ventilation, etc., must be thoroughly

understood before proceeding with the installation.

Protective gear is to be worn during installation,

operation and service. Thin sheet metal parts have

sharp edges. To prevent injury, the use of work

gloves is recommended.

Before installation, check that the local distribution

conditions, nature of gas and pressure and

adjustment of the appliance are compatible.

This equipment must be applied and operated under

the general concepts of reasonable use and installed

using the best building practices.

This appliance is not intended for use by persons

(including children) with reduced physical, sensory or

mental capabilities, or lack of experience and

knowledge, unless they have been given supervision

or instruction concerning the use of the appliance by

a person responsible for their safety.

Children should be supervised to ensure that they do

not play with the appliance.

For additional copies of the Installation, Operation

and Service Manual, please contact Weather-Rite

LLC.

Gas-fired appliances are not designed for use in

atmospheres containing flammable vapors or dust or

atmospheres containing chlorinated or halogenated

hydrocarbons. Recirculated room air may be

hazardous if containing flammable solids, liquids,

and gases; explosive materials; and/or substances

which may become toxic when exposed to heat (i.e.

refrigerants, aerosols, etc.).

1.1 Description of Operation

This air handler is a direct gas-fired applianc8e. It is

designed for indoor or outdoor installation with fresh

outdoor air delivered to the burner. Air handlers are

designed to operate in temperatures as low as -40 °F

(-40 °C). The air handler is factory-tested to fire with

natural gas or LPG (check the air handler's rating

plate for information on the appropriate type of fuel).

The burner will operate to maintain the selected

discharge air temperature or room/space air

temperature, depending on the selected options. See Page 104, Section 21.

The air handler may be provided with several

different controls and options to meet various

application requirements. Be sure to read this entire

manual before installation and start-up.

1.2 Inspection and Setup

The air handler is shipped in multiple sections based

on the configuration selected. The air handler was

inspected and operated prior to shipment.

Immediately upon receipt of the air handler, check

the fuel and electrical characteristics of the air

handler and verify that they match the fuel and

electrical supply available. Verify that the

specifications on the air handler rating plate match

the order. Check the air handler for any damage that

may have occurred during shipment. If any damage

is found, file a claim with the transporting agency. Do

not refuse shipment. Check the installation location

to ensure proper clearances to combustibles. See Page 10, Section 3.1.

Any small options which do not come attached to the

air handler (i.e. remote panel or disconnect) will be

found inside the air handler.

Larger accessories (i.e. legs, stand, filter section,

inlet hood) may either ship with the air handler or

separately. Check the bill of lading for information.

If the air handler must be temporarily stored, (i.e. job

site is not ready for installation of the air handler), the

air handler should be set on 4" x 4" (10 cm x 10 cm)

pieces of timber on the ground in a protected area.

Cover the air handler to protect it from the

environment.

TT-SERIES INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL

2 of 198

1.3 Safety Labels and Their Placement

Product safety signs or labels should be replaced by

product user if they are no longer legible. Please

contact Weather-Rite LLC or your WEATHER-RITE™

independent distributor to obtain replacement signs

or labels. See Page 2, Figure 1 through Page 6, Figure 8.

1.4 California Proposition 65

In accordance with California Proposition 65

requirements, a warning label must be placed in a

highly visible location on the outside of the

equipment. (i.e. near equipment's serial plate). See

label placement drawing on Page 2, Figure 1 through Page 3, Figure 2 for label location. Avoid placing

label on areas with extreme heat, cold, corrosive

chemicals or other elements. To order additional

labels, please contact Weather-Rite LLC or your

WEATHER-RITE™ independent distributor.

1.5 Label Placement

FIGURE 1: TT-112-TT221 Horizontal

3

1

2

4 5

11

6

810 9

713

1312

14

14

Item Part Number Description1 91070002 Danger - Severe Injury

2 Ref Logo

3 91070001 Danger - Electric Shock

4 91070004 Warning - Fire

5 91070006 Warning - Burn

6 91070005 Warning - Fall

7 19162 Rotation

8 19030 Recommended Entry

9 91010427 Vent Outdoors

10 14302333 Installation Manual Enclosed

11 14302372 Burner Access

12 14302389 Sight Port

13 14302390 Test

14 P-001720 Fan Bearing Lubrication


3 of 198

FIGURE 2: TT224-TT236 Horizontal

FIGURE 3: TT112- 221 Upright

13 12

11

7

13 6

2

4 5

10

8 9

1414


2 Ref Logo





7 19162 Rotation






13 14302390 Test


6

3

2

1010

8

9

4

1311 12

1

7


2 Ref Logo





7 19162 Rotation






13 14302390 Test



4 of 198

FIGURE 4: TT224-TT236 Upright

7

1

6 3

2

1010

9

8

11

4 5

12

13


2 Ref Logo





7 19162 Rotation






13 14302390 Test



5 of 198

FIGURE 5: TT118 Upright

FIGURE 6: TT118 Horizontal

7

1

10

9

8

11

2

1

36

4 5

12

13


2 Ref Logo





7 19162 Rotation






13 14302390 Test


2

13 13 12

11

7

1

3 6

1098

1 4 5


2 Ref Logo





7 19162 Rotation






13 14302390 Test



6 of 198

FIGURE 7: 2" NPT or Smaller Gas Train Control Panel Interior

FIGURE 8: 2.5" NPT or Larger Gas Train Control Panel Interior

Exterior Interior

22

213

2

6

23 2410

Item Part Number Description3 91070001 Danger - Electric Shock



21 Ref Serial Data Plate

22 Ref Electrical Schematic

23 91070016 California Proposition 65

24 Ref Agency Approval - ETL (optional)

25 Ref Agency Approval - ULC (optional)

3 6

Exterior

10

22

242321

Interior




21 Ref Serial Data Plate

22 Ref Electrical Schematic

23 91070016 California Proposition 65

24 Ref Agency Approval - ETL (optional)

25 Ref Agency Aprroval - ULC (optional)


7 of 198

FIGURE 9: Remote Panel

FIGURE 10: Aux Control Panel


20a 91070032 Danger - Electric Shock

20b 910700033 Danger - Electric Shock


20a 91070032 Danger - Electric Shock

20b 910700033 Danger - Electric Shock


8 of 198

SECTION 2: INSTALLER RESPONSIBILITY

The installer is responsible for the following:

• To install and commission the air handler, as well

as the gas and electrical supplies, in accordance

with applicable specifications and codes.

Weather-Rite LLC recommends the installer

contact a local building inspector or Fire Marshal

for guidance.

• To use the information given in a layout drawing

and in the manual together with the cited codes

and regulations to perform the installation.

• To install the heater in accordance with the

clearances to combustibles.

• To furnish all needed materials not furnished as

standard equipment.

• To plan location of supports.

• To provide access to air handler for servicing.

• To provide the owner with a copy of this

Installation, Operation and Service Manual.

• To never use heater as support for a ladder or

other access equipment and never hang or

suspend anything from heater.

• To ensure there is adequate air circulation around

the air handler and to supply air for combustion,

ventilation and distribution in accordance with

local codes.

• To assemble or install any accessories or

associated duct work using best building

practices.

• To properly size supports and hanging materials.

• To ensure heater is placed in an approved

application.

2.1 Corrosive Chemicals

Weather-Rite LLC cannot be responsible for ensuring

that all appropriate safety measures are undertaken

prior to installation; this is entirely the responsibility of

the installer. It is essential that the contractor, the

sub-contractor, or the owner identifies the presence

of combustible materials, corrosive chemicals or

halogenated hydrocarbons* anywhere in the

premises.* Halogenated Hydrocarbons are a family of chemical compounds characterized by the presence of halogen elements (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, etc.). These compounds are frequently used in refrigerants, cleaning agents, solvents, etc. If these compounds enter the air supply of the burner, the life span of the air handler components will be greatly reduced. An out-side air supply must be provided to the burners whenever the presence of these compounds is suspected. Warranty will be invalid if the air handler is exposed to halogenated hydrocar-bons.

2.2 Required Equipment

When lifting of the equipment is required, the

installing contractor is responsible for supplying or

arranging for the appropriate lifting equipment so that

the air handler and accessories may be placed in a

safe manner.

The qualified installer or service technician is

responsible for having the appropriate equipment for

the safe installation and start-up of a direct-fired air

handler. Tools required to commission the equipment

include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Various screwdriver types and sizes

• Various adjustable wrenches

• Torque wrenches

WARNING

Explosion Hazard

Equipment must have access to uncontaminated air at all times.


CAUTION

Product Damage Hazard

Do not use equipment in area containing corrosive chemicals.

Refer to appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

Failure to follow these instructions can result in product damage.

SECTION 2: INSTALLER RESPONSIBILITY

9 of 198

• Pipe wrenches sized appropriately for the gas

train components

• Drill motor and various drills

• U-tube manometer or Magnehelic® gauge (0 to

1.0" w.c.)

• U-tube manometer or gas pressure gauge (0 to

5# and 0 to 30" w.c.)

• Volt meter

• Clamp style ammeter

• Belt tension gauge

• Paintable latex caulk (silicone caulk is not to be

used)


10 of 198

SECTION 3: CRITICAL CONSIDERATIONS

3.1 Required Clearances to Combustibles

Clearances are the required distances that

combustible objects must be away from the air

handler to prevent fire hazards. Combustibles are

materials that may catch on fire and include common

items such as wood, paper, rubber, fabric, etc.

Maintain clearances to combustibles at all times for safety.

Check the clearances on each air handler being

installed to make sure the product is suitable for your

application and the clearances are maintained.

Minimum clearances for all models are as follows:

• 18" (45.7 cm) Above the top of the equipment

• 18" (45.7 cm) Along the sides of the equipment

• 18" (45.7 cm) Under the floor of the equipment

(when suspended)

Read and follow the safety guidelines below:

• Locate the air handler so that the air intakes are

not too close to any exhaust fan outlets (refer to

applicable codes for minimum distance to exhaust

fan outlets), gasoline storage, propane tanks or

other contaminants that could potentially cause

dangerous situations.

• Keep gasolines or other combustible materials

including flammable objects, liquids, dust or

vapors away from this air handler or any other

appliance.

• Maintain clearances from heat sensitive material,

equipment and workstations.

Clearances to combustibles do not denote

clearances for accessibility. Minimum clearance

for access is 48" (122 cm). Minimum clearance for

accessibility applies to the control enclosure,

blower access panel and filter access panel

(when equipped).

The stated clearances to combustibles represent

a surface temperature of 90 °F (50 °C) above

room temperature (90 °F [50 °C] plus ambient

temperature). Building materials with a low heat

tolerance (i.e. plastics, vinyl siding, canvas, tri-ply,

etc.) may be subject to degradation at lower

temperatures. It is the installer's responsibility to

assure that adjacent materials are protected from

degradation. Maintain clearances from heat

sensitive material, equipment and work stations.

• Maintain clearances from vehicles parked below

the air handler. See Page 11, Section 4.4.

3.2 Purge of Supply Duct

If this heating unit is to be installed indoors, and its

outdoor air supply ducted from outdoors, ANSI

Standards Z83.4/CSA 3.7, Z83.18 and Z83.25/CSA

3.19 require that all supply duct shall be purged a

minimum of four times prior to any ignition attempt. If

the volume of the outdoor air supply duct exceeds

the heating unit's ability to complete the required four

air changes prior to ignition, you must contact the

factory to purchase an extended purge card of the

appropriate duration to meet this requirement.

3.3 Hardware

Unless otherwise specified, all hardware must be

torqued to settings from Page 10, Table 1.

Table 1: Recommended Torque Settings

WARNING

Fire Hazard

Keep all flammable objects, liquids and vapors the minimum required clearances to combustibles away from equipment.



Bolt HeadGrade Marking

Nut GradeMarking

Bolt Size Grade 2 Grade 510-24 27 in•lb 42 in•lb

1/4-20 65 in•lb 101 in•lb

5/16-18 11 ft•lb 17 ft•lb

3/8-16 19 ft•lb 30 ft•lb

SECTION 4: NATIONAL STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE CODES

11 of 198

SECTION 4: NATIONAL STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE CODESAll appliances must be installed in accordance with

the latest revision of the applicable standards and

national codes. This also refers to the electric, gas

and venting installation.

4.1 Fuel Codes

The type of gas appearing on the nameplate

must be the type of gas used. Installation must

comply with national and local codes and

requirements of the local gas company.

United States: Refer to NFPA 54/ANSI Z223.1 -

latest revision, National Fuel Gas Code.

Canada: Refer to CSA B149.1- latest revision,

Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.

4.2 Installation Codes

Installations must be made in accordance with

NFPA 90A - latest revision, Standard for the

Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation

Systems.

4.3 Aircraft Hangars

Installation in aircraft hangars must be in

accordance with the following codes:

United States: Refer to Standard on Aircraft

Hangars, NFPA 409 - latest revision.

Canada: Refer to Natural Gas and Propane

Installation Code, Standard CSA B14 - latest

revision.

4.4 Parking Structures and Repair Garages

Installation in garages must be in accordance

with the following codes:

United States: Refer to Standard for Parking

Structures, NFPA 88A - latest revision or the

Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and

Repair Garages, NFPA 30A - latest revision.

Canada: Refer to Natural Gas and Propane

Installation Code, Standard CSA B149.1 - latest

revision.

4.5 Electrical

Electrical connection to air handler must be in

accordance with the following codes:

United States: Refer to National Electrical

Code®, NFPA 70 - latest revision. Wiring must

conform to the most current National Electrical

Code®, local ordinances, and any special

diagrams furnished.

Canada: Refer to Canadian Electrical Code,

CSA C22.1 Part 1 - latest revision.

4.6 Venting

This air handler must be vented in accordance

with the requirements within this manual and

with the following codes and any state,

provincial or local codes which may apply:

United States: Refer to NFPA 54/ANSI Z223.1-

latest revision, National Fuel Gas Code.

Canada: Refer to CSA B149.1 - latest revision,


4.7 High Altitude

These air handlers are approved for installations

up to 2000' (609.6 m) (US), 4500' (1371.6 m)

(Canada) without modification. Consult factory if

US installation is above 2000' or Canadian

installation is above 4500’(1371.6 m).


12 of 198

SECTION 5: SPECIFICATIONSDimension and estimated weight tables apply to both

upright and horizontal air handlers of the same

model.

The maximum total static pressure is listed by model

in Page 24, Table 27. To calculate the available

external static pressure (ESP), calculate the internal

static pressure (ISP) with the use of Page 75, Table 32 and then subtract that value from the TSP. If more

external static pressure is required, this needs to be

requested with the order as required motor

horsepower (HP) may increase from the

specifications given.

The legend below is a list of abbreviations used in

this section and applies to Page 12, Figure 11

through Page 23, Figure 22.

Table 2: Legend

FIGURE 11: Horizontal Model Dimensions (Models TT112 and TT115)

Table 3: Cabinet Dimensions (Models TT112 and TT115)

Table 4: Filters (Permanent, Polyester or Pleated)

RA = Return Air BD = Bottom Discharge

OA = Outside Air ED = End Discharge

CE = Control Enclosure AD2 = Filter Access Door

AD1 = Unit Access Panel TD = Top Discharge

SD = Side Discharge

Model A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T V W X Y Z*

TT112in

cm28.0

71.1

36.0

91.4

58.0

147.3

13.4

34.0

15.6

39.6

24.0

61.0

15.0

38.1

5.0

12.7

17.2

43.7

16.0

40.6

10.2

25.9

1.0

2.5

26.0

66.0

34.0

86.4

48.0

121.9

5.0

12.7

19.5

49.5

7.0

17.8

8.0

20.3

1.0

2.5

18.5

47.0

33.0

83.8

2.0

5.1

TT115in

cm28.0

71.1

36.0

91.4

58.0

147.3

15.9

40.4

18.6

47.2

24.0

61.0

15.0

38.1

5.0

12.7

17.2

43.7

16.0

40.6

8.9

22.6

1.0

2.5

26.0

66.0

34.0

86.4

48.0

121.9

5.0

12.7

19.5

49.5

8.3

21.1

8.0

20.3

3.8

9.7

18.5

47.0

33.0

83.8

2.0

5.1

SIDEVIEW N

V

SR

T D G F QK

C

A D

WX

V

M

PLANVIEW N N

S

B E

L

BD RA

H

P

AD2

AD2AD1

CE

Y

OA

OA

ED

ED

BD

RA

J

MOTORIZEDDISCHARGE

DAMPER (OPTIONAL)BURNER / BLOWER SECTION FILTER SECTION

(OPTIONAL)

MOTORIZEDINLET DAMPER

(OPTIONAL)

INLET HOODWITH BIRDSCREEN

(OPTIONAL)

Z Z

NOTE: *'Z' dimension reflects curb angle for

horizontal orientation. (Optional)

Model QuantitySize

in cm

TT1123

3

2 x 20 x 20

2 x 16 x 20

5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8

5.08 x 40.6 x 50.8

TT1153

3

2 x 20 x 20

2 x 16 x 20

5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8

5.08 x 40.6 x 50.8

SECTION 5: SPECIFICATIONS

13 of 198

FIGURE 12: Upright Model Dimensions (Models TT112 and TT115)

Table 5: Estimated Shipping Weights (Models TT112 and TT115)

Table 6: Estimated Shipping Weights - Motors

SIDEVIEW N

ENDVIEW

EB

L

SD

RA

N

HAD1

AD2

PN

V

F

C

G

K

D

T

S

R

DA X

W

S

V

M

CE

J

Y

SD

RA

TD TD

OA OA

MOT

ORIZ

EDDI

SCHA

RGE

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)

BURN

ER /

BLOW

ERSE

CTIO

NFI

LTER

SEC

TION

(OPT

IONA

L)

MOT

ORIZ

EDIN

LET

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)

ModelBurner/Blower Section

Filter Section

Inlet Hood

WeatherizingDischarge/

Inlet Damper

Roof Curb

Legs StandService Platform

Four-Way Discharge

Plenum

Double Deflection Discharge Louvers

Burner/Blower

Filter Section

TT112lbkg

400

181.4

63

28.6

30

13.6

75

34.0

40

18.1

75

34.0

98

44.5

70

31.8

125

56.7

400

181.4

80

36.3

70

31.8

TT115lbkg

525

238.1

63

28.6

30

13.6

75

34.0

40

18.1

75

34.0

98

44.5

70

31.8

125

56.7

400

181.4

80

36.3

70

31.8

SizeHP kW

.75

.561

.751.5 1.1

2 1.5

3 2.2

5 3.7

7.5 5.6

10 7.5

15 11.2

20 14.9

25 18.6

30 22.4

40 30.0

50 37.0

60 44.7

75 55.9

Standardlbkg

3515.9

3515.9

4520.4

4520.4

7031.8

8538.6

13059.0

15570.3

22099.8

275124.7

300136.1

360163.3

500226.8

550249.5

800362.9

950430.9

2-Speedlbkg

7031.8

8538.6

12556.7

15068.0

18583.9

21597.5

270122.5

310140.6

405183.7

455206.4

525238.1

570258.5

700317.5

760344.7

N/A N/A


14 of 198

FIGURE 13: Horizontal Model Dimensions (Model TT118)

Table 7: Cabinet Dimensions (Model TT118)

Table 8: Filters (Permanent, Polyester, or Pleated)

CE

BB

Y

VT NUPQ

R K

N

U

S

N

KM

P

XL

AD2

J

AD1

AD1AD1

H

G

FE

D

C

A

B

EE

S

DD

BD RA

AD1 AD1

MOTORIZEDDISCHARGE

DAMPER (OPTIONAL)BLOWER SECTION FILTER / BURNER

SECTION


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)

SIDEVIEW

PLANVIEW OA

OA

ED

ED

BDRA

N

NOTE: *'S' dimension reflects curb angle for


Model A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S* T U V X Y BB DD EE

TT118in

cm17.0

43.2

26.0

66.0

60.0

152.4

19.1

48.5

21.9

55.6

50.0

127

16.2

41.1

33.0

83.8

58.0

147.3

19.5

49.5

18.0

45.7

30.0

76.2

8.0

20.3

18.9

48.0

10.4

26.4

10.3

26.2

2.0

5.1

12.0

30.5

45.0

114.3

1.9

4.8

0.8

2.0

28.0

71.1

38.0

96.5

5.0

12.7

10.0

25.4

Model QuantitySize

in cm

TT118 6 2 x 20 x 25 5.08 x 50.8 x 63.5


15 of 198

FIGURE 14: Upright Model Dimensions (Model TT118)

Table 9: Estimated Shipping Weights (Models TT118)


N

K

R

V

T

PU

U

Q

K

N N

M

P X

L

G

CE

N

Y

SIDEVIEW

ENDVIEW

J

H

DDF

B A

C

E D

AD1

AD1 AD1

SD

RA

AD1

AD1RA

SD

TD

OA OA

TD

MOT

ORIZ

EDDI

SCHA

RGE

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)BL

OWER

SEC

TION

FILT

ER /

BURN

ERSE

CTIO

N

MOT

ORIZ

EDIN

LET

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)


Inlet Hood


Inlet Damper

Roof CurbLegs Stand

Serivce Platform

Four-Way Discharge

Plenum


Burner/Blower

Filter Section

TT118lbkg

700

317.5

55

24.9

75

34.0

70

31.8N/A

100

45.4

70

31.8

140

63.5

400

181.4

80

36.3

70

31.8

SizeHP kW

.75

.561

.751.5 1.1

2 1.5

3 2.2

5 3.7

7.5 5.6

10 7.5

15 11.2

20 14.9

25 18.6

30 22.4

40 30.0

50 37.0

60 44.7

75 55.9

Standardlb 35 35 45 45 70 85 130 155 220 275 300 360 500 550 800 950

kg 15.9 15.9 20.4 20.4 31.8 38.6 59.0 70.3 99.8 124.7 136.1 163.3 226.8 249.5 362.9 430.9

2-Speedlb 70 85 125 150 185 215 270 310 405 455 525 570 700 760

N/A N/Akg 31.8 38.6 56.7 68.0 83.9 97.5 122.5 140.6 183.7 206.4 238.1 258.5 317.5 344.7


16 of 198

FIGURE 15: Horizontal Model Dimensions (Models TT212 - TT221)

Table 11: Cabinet Dimensions (Models TT212 - TT221)


Model A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U* V W X Y Z AA BB

TT212in

cm28.0

71.1

60.0

152.4

58.0

147.3

13.4

34.0

15.6

39.6

24.0

61.0

15.0

38.1

5.0

12.7

50.0

127

16.0

40.6

8.9

22.6

1.0

2.54

26.0

66.0

58.0

147.3

48.0

121.9

5.0

12.7

19.5

49.5

7.0

17.8

2.0

5.1

50.0

127

1.0

2.54

11.0

27.9

18.5

47.0

33.0

83.8

16.9

42.9

8.0

20.3

TT215in

cm28.0

71.1

72.0

182.9

58.0

147.3

15.9

40.4

18.6

47.2

28.0

71.1

15.0

38.1

7.0

17.8

58.0

147.3

16.0

40.6

11.9

30.2

1.0

2.54

26.0

66.0

70.0

177.8

48.0

121.9

5.0

12.7

19.5

49.5

8.3

21.1

2.0

5.1

50.0

127

3.8

9.65

11.0

27.9

18.5

47.0

33.0

83.8

16.9

42.9

8.0

20.3

TT218in

cm36.0

91.4

72.0

182.9

62.0

157.5

18.9

48.0

21.9

55.6

24.0

61.0

15.0

38.1

7.0

17.8

58.0

147.3

14.0

35.6

7.0

17.8

6.0

15.2

33.0

83.8

69.0

175.3

72.0

182.9

6.0

15.2

26.0

66.0

10.5

26.7

2.0

5.1

58.0

147.3

10.5

26.7

14.3

36.3

20.0

50.8

33.0

83.8

16.9

42.9

8.0

20.3

TT221in

cm42.0

106.7

100.0

254

72.0

182.9

24.8

63.0

22.8

57.9

26.0

66.0

20.0

50.8

10.1

25.4

80.0

203.2

14.0

35.6

15.5

39.4

1.0

2.54

38.0

96.5

96.0

243.8

72.0

182.9

6.0

15.2

33.0

83.8

11.3

28.7

2.0

5.1

76.0

193.4

4.8

12.2

23.5

59.7

20.0

50.8

33.0

83.8

16.9

42.9

8.0

20.3

Q

N

U

SR

T D G FK

C

AD

WY

U

BB

S

M

P

AD2

AD2

CE

RABD

AD1

Z

AA

E

E

X

L

BV J

H

SIDEVIEW

PLANVIEW OA

OA

ED

ED

BDRA

MOTORIZEDDISCHARGE


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)

BB

NOTE: *'U' dimension reflects curb angle for


NOTE: Model TT221 has 1.5" (3.91cm) mounting

channel above curb angle.

Model QuantitySize

in cm

TT212 9 2 x 20 x 20 5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8

TT2154

4

2 x 20 x 25

2 x 16 x 25

5.08 x 50.8 x 63.5

5.08 x 40.6 x 63.5

TT2158

8

2 x 20 x 20

2 x 16 x 25

5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8

5.08 x 40.6 x 63.5

TT221 16 2 x 20 x 25 5.08 x 50.8 x 63.5


17 of 198

FIGURE 16: Upright Model Dimensions (Models TT212 and TT221)

Table 13: Estimated Shipping Weights (Models TT212 - TT221)



Filter Section

Inlet Hood

Weatherizing

Roof Curb


Four-Way Discharge

Plenum

Double Deflection DischargeLouvers

Discharge/ Inlet

Damper

Burner/Blower

Filter Section

TT212lbkg

560

254.0

95

43.1

45

20.4

75

34.0

70

31.8

100

45.4

130

59.0

70

31.8

140

63.5

400

181.4

80

36.3

70

31.8

TT215lbkg

740

335.7

130

59.0

60

27.2

100

45.4

100

45.4

125

56.7

163

73.9

70

31.8

150

68.0

480

217.7

105

47.6

95

43.1

TT218lbkg

950

430.9

300

136.1

150

68.0

135

61.2

150

68.0

150

68.0

195

88.5

70

31.8

160

72.6

480

217.7

140

63.5

130

59.0

TT221lbkg

1,432

649.5

625

283.5

132

59.9

156

70.8

325

147.4

200

90.7

260

117.9N/A

175

79.4

520

235.9

270

122.5

260

118.0

N

BB

F

C

G

K

D

T

S

R

D

A Y

W

S

BB

M

CE

AA

P

Z

AD1RA

SD

E EX L

B

J

H

V

AD2 AD2

SIDEVIEW

ENDVIEW

OA OA

RA

SD

TD TD

MOT

ORIZ

EDDI

SCHA

RGE

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)BU

RNER

/ BL

OWER

SEC

TION

FILT

ER S

ECTI

ON(O

PTIO

NAL)

MOT

ORIZ

EDIN

LET

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)

NOTE: Model TT221 has 1.5" (3.91 cm) mounting channel above curb angle.

SizeHP kW

.75

.561

.751.5 1.1

2 1.5

3 2.2

5 3.7

7.5 5.6

10 7.5

15 11.2

20 14.9

25 18.6

30 22.4

40 30.0

50 37.0

60 44.7

75 55.9

Standardlb 35 35 45 45 70 85 130 155 220 275 300 360 500 550 800 950

kg 15.9 15.9 20.4 20.4 31.8 38.6 59.0 70.3 99.8 124.7 136.1 163.3 226.8 249.5 362.9 430.9

2-Speedlb 70 85 125 150 185 215 270 310 405 455 525 570 700 760

N/A N/Akg 31.8 38.6 56.7 68.0 83.9 97.5 122.5 140.6 183.7 206.4 238.1 258.5 317.5 344.7


18 of 198

FIGURE 17: Horizontal Model Dimensions (Models TT224 and TT230)



Model A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z*

TT224in

cm55.0

139.7

110.0

279.4

5.0

12.7

35.0

88.9

90.0

228.6

10.0

25.4

20.0

50.8

31.0

78.7

100.0

254

55.0

139.7

10.0

25.4

100.0

254

51.0

129.5

106.0

269.2

26.0

66.0

.75

1.9

3.0

7.6

8.0

20.3

3.0

7.6

116.0

294.6

122.0

309.9

6.0

15.2

60.0

152.4

2.0

5.1

TT230in

cm60.0

152.4

145.0

368.3

5.0

12.7

40.0

101.6

115.0

292.1

10.0

25.4

25.0

63.5

31.0

78.7

135.0

342.9

55.0

139.7

15.0

38.1

100.0

254

55.0

139.7

140.0

355.6

26.0

66.0

.75

1.9

3.0

7.6

5.0

12.7

4.0

10.2

151.0

383.5

157.0

398.8

6.0

15.2

60.0

152.4

2.0

5.1

A

E

D

FQ

B P

N

E J

HCE

F

R

R S

L

X

AD1C AD2

AD2

D

K

G

M

Y

D

U

T

T

SIDEVIEW

PLANVIEW OA

OA

ED

ED

BD RA

MOTORIZEDDISCHARGE


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)

ZZU

NOTE: *’Z’ dimension reflects curb angle for


Model QuantitySize

in cm

TT22418

12

2 x 20 x 20

2 x 20 x 25

5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8

5.08 x 50.8 x 63.5

TT2306

30

2 x 20 x 25

2 x 20 x 25

5.08 x 50.8 x 63.5

5.08 x 50.8 x 63.5


19 of 198

FIGURE 18: Upright Model Dimensions (Models TT224 - TT230)

Table 17: Estimated Shipping Weights (Models TT224 - TT230)



Filter Section

Inlet Hood


Inlet Damper

Roof Curb


Four-Way Discharge

Plenum


Burner/Blower

Filter Section

TT224lbkg

2,975

1,349.4

980

444.5

182

82.6

200

90.7

470

213.2

300

136.1

450

204.1N/A

300

136.1

575

260.8

385

174.6

375

170.1

TT230lbkg

4,300

1,950.4

1,140

517.1

281

127.5

300

136.1

100

45.4

375

170.1

488

221.4N/A

425

192.8

650

294.8

410

186.0

400

181.4

SizeHP kW

.75

.561

.751.5 1.1

2 1.5

3 2.2

5 3.7

7.5 5.6

10 7.5

15 11.2

20 14.9

25 18.6

30 22.4

40 30.0

50 37.0

60 44.7

75 55.9

Standardlb 35 35 45 45 70 85 130 155 220 275 300 360 500 550 800 950

kg 15.9 15.9 20.4 20.4 31.8 38.6 59.0 70.3 99.8 124.7 136.1 163.3 226.8 249.5 362.9 430.9

2-Speedlb 70 85 125 150 185 215 270 310 405 455 525 570 700 760

N/A N/Akg 31.8 38.6 56.7 68.0 83.9 97.5 122.5 140.6 183.7 206.4 238.1 258.5 317.5 344.7

N

U

Q

M

G

K D

T

D

D

F

T

A

W

VS

P

AD2AD2

AD1

CEJ

C

E

E

B

L

H

SD

RA

SIDEVIEW

ENDVIEW

OA OA

RA

SD

TD TD

MOT

ORIZ

EDDI

SCHA

RGE

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)BU

RNER

/ BL

OWER

SEC

TION

FILT

ER S

ECTI

ON(O

PTIO

NAL)

MOT

ORIZ

EDIN

LET

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)

MOU

NTIN

GCH

ANNE

L(O

PTIO

NAL)

F


20 of 198

FIGURE 19: Non-Recirculating Horizontal Model Dimensions (Models TT233 and TT236)



Model A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S V W Z*

TT224in

cm133.0

337.8

160.0

406.4

31.0

78.7

0.8

2.0

3.0

7.6

6.0

15.2

43.0

109.2

10.0

25.4

72.0

182.9

17.0

43.2

10.0

25.4

110.0

279.4

67.0

170.2

155.0

393.7

4.0

10.2

26.0

66.0

60.0

152.4

166.0

421.6

172.0

436.9

2.0

5.1

TT230in

cm133.0

337.8

180.0

457.2

31.0

78.7

0.8

2.0

3.0

7.6

6.0

15.2

43.0

109.2

10.0

25.4

72.0

182.9

22.0

55.9

25.0

63.5

110.0

279.4

67.0

170.2

175.0

444.5

4.0

10.2

26.0

66.0

60.0

152.4

186.0

472.4

192.0

487.7

2.0

5.1

AD1

CE

SZQ HRM

GF

J

F

NG G

A A

H

K

L

B

C

AD2

AD2

P

FED

BD

SIDEVIEW

PLANVIEW OA

OA

ED

ED

BD

MOTORIZEDDISCHARGE


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)

ZQ

NOTE: *’Z’ dimension reflects curb angle for


Model QuantitySize

in cm

TT224 56 2 x 20 x 20 5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8

TT236 63 2 x 20 x 20 5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8


21 of 198

FIGURE 20: Non-Recirculating Upright Model Dimensions (Models TT233 and TT236)



W

CE

AD2 AD2

AD1

VD

P

B

L

A

AKC

Q

H

R

G

M

F

G

G F

J

H

SD

SIDEVIEW

ENDVIEW

OA OA

SD

TDTD

MOT

ORIZ

EDDI

SCHA

RGE

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)BU

RNER

/ BL

OWER

SEC

TION

FILT

ER S

ECTI

ON(O

PTIO

NAL)

MOT

ORIZ

EDIN

LET

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)

MOU

NTIN

GCH

ANNE

L(O

PTIO

NAL)

N


Filter Section

Inlet Hood


Inlet Damper

Roof Curb


Four-Way Discharge

Head


Burner/Blower

Filter Section

TT224lbkg

5,600

2,540.1

1,300

589.7

365

165.6

325

147.4

690

313.0

500

226.8

650

294.8N/A

700

317.5

700

317.5

510

231.3

500

226.8

TT230lbkg

5,900

2,676.2

1,430

648.6

400

181.4

325

147.4

690

313.0

500

226.8

650

294.8N/A

700

317.5

700

317.5

510

231.3

500

226.8

SizeHP kW

.75

.561

.751.5 1.1

2 1.5

3 2.2

5 3.7

7.5 5.6

10 7.5

15 11.2

20 14.9

25 18.6

30 22.4

40 30.0

50 37.0

60 44.7

75 55.9

Standardlb 35 35 45 45 70 85 130 155 220 275 300 360 500 550 800 950

kg 15.9 15.9 20.4 20.4 31.8 38.6 59.0 70.3 99.8 124.7 136.1 163.3 226.8 249.5 362.9 430.9

2-Speedlb 70 85 125 150 185 215 270 310 405 455 525 570 700 760

N/A N/Akg 31.8 38.6 56.7 68.0 83.9 97.5 122.5 140.6 183.7 206.4 238.1 258.5 317.5 344.7


22 of 198

FIGURE 21: Recirculating Horizontal Model Dimensions (Models TT-233 and TT-236)



Model A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA*

TT212in

cm

133.0

337.8

160.0

406.4

31.0

78.7

3.0

7.6

6.0

15.2

0.8

2.0

4.0

10.2

43.0

109.2

150.0

381

17.0

43.2

10.0

25.4

72.0

182.9

67.0

170.2

155.0

393.7

75.0

190.5

110.0

279.4

25.0

63.5

36.0

91.4

26.0

66.0

166.0

421.6

172.0

436.9

10.0

25.4

60.0

152.4

5.0

12.7

2.0

5.1

TT215in

cm

133.0

337.8

180.0

457.2

31.0

78.7

3.0

7.6

6.0

15.2

0.8

2.0

4.0

10.2

43.0

109.2

170.0

431.8

22.0

55.9

25.0

63.5

72.0

182.9

67.0

170.2

175.0

444.5

75.0

190.5

110.0

279.4

25.0

63.5

36.0

91.4

26.0

66.0

186.0

472.4

192.0

487.7

10.0

25.4

60.0

152.4

5.0

12.7

2.0

5.1

Y

AD2

AD2AD1

CE

AAUT

R

SQ

HE

M H

E

H

AA

X

N

PJ

Z

B A

L

K

C

A

EDF

SIDEVIEW

PLANVIEW OA

OA

ED

ED

BD RA

MOTORIZEDDISCHARGE

DAMPER (OPTIONAL)BLOWER SECTION BURNER

SECTIONFILTER SECTION

(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)


(OPTIONAL)

GG

NOTE: *'AA' dimension reflects curb angle for


Model QuantitySize

in cm

TT224 56 2 x 20 x 20 5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8

TT236 63 2 x 20 x 20 5.08 x 50.8 x 50.8


23 of 198

FIGURE 22: Recirculating Upright Model Dimensions (Models TT233 and TT236)



W

CE

AD2 AD2

AD1

VF

P

J

Z

AB

L

A

KC

G

X

N

U

T

HQ

S

R

E

H

H E

M

X

RA

SD

SIDEVIEW

ENDVIEW

OA OA

RA

SD

TD TD

MOT

ORIZ

EDDI

SCHA

RGE

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)BU

RNER

SEC

TION

BLOW

ER S

ECTI

ONFI

LTER

SEC

TION

(OPT

IONA

L)

MOT

ORIZ

EDIN

LET

DAM

PER

(OPT

IONA

L)

MOU

NTIN

GCH

ANNE

L(O

PTIO

NAL)


Filter Section

Inltet Hood


Inlet Damper

Roof Curb


Four-Way Discharge

Plenum


Burner/Blower

Fiter Section

Recirculating

TT224lbkg

5,600

2,540.1

1,300

589.7

365

165.6

325

147.4

690

313.0

500

226.8

650

294.8N/A

700

317.5

700

317.5

510

231.3

500

226.8

TT230lbkg

5,900

2,676.2

1,430

648.6

400

181.4

325

147.4

690

313.0

500

226.8

650

294.8N/A

700

317.5

700

317.5

510

231.3

500

226.8

SizeHP kW

.75

.561

.751.5 1.1

2 1.5

3 2.2

5 3.7

7.5 5.6

10 7.5

15 11.2

20 14.9

25 18.6

30 22.4

40 30.0

50 37.0

60 44.7

75 55.9

Standardlb 35 35 45 45 70 85 130 155 220 275 300 360 500 550 800 950

kg 15.9 15.9 20.4 20.4 31.8 38.6 59.0 70.3 99.8 124.7 136.1 163.3 226.8 249.5 362.9 430.9

2-Speedlb 70 85 125 150 185 215 270 310 405 455 525 570 700 760

N/A N/Akg 31.8 38.6 56.7 68.0 83.9 97.5 122.5 140.6 183.7 206.4 238.1 258.5 317.5 344.7


24 of 198

Table 27: Blower Motor Horsepower Selection

Mo

del

TT

112

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity

Total Static Pressure.50 in wc / 1.25 mbar

.75 in wc /1.87 mbar

1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP1,600 2,718 1,111 5.64 0 603 0.231,800 3,058 1,250 6.35 20 609 0.27 737 0.382,000 3,398 1,388 7.05 30 617 0.33 741 0.43 850 0.552,200 3,738 1,527 7.76 40 627 0.38 746 0.50 852 0.62 951 0.762,400 4,078 1,666 8.46 50 641 0.44 754 0.57 858 0.71 953 0.84 1041 0.992,600 4,417 1,805 9.17 60 656 0.52 764 0.65 864 0.80 956 0.94 1043 1.10 1125 1.242,800 4,757 1,944 9.88 70 673 0.60 775 0.75 872 0.90 962 1.06 1047 1.21 1127 1.37 1203 1.543,200 5,437 2,222 11.29 80 712 0.80 805 0.96 894 1.13 970 1.17 1058 1.48 1135 1.66 1208 1.83 1278 2.03 1345 2.223,600 6,116 2,500 12.70 90 759 1.06 841 1.22 922 1.40 1001 1.59 1077 1.78 1149 1.98 1219 2.18 1286 2.38 1350 2.584,000 6,796 2,777 14.11 100 808 1.37 881 1.54 956 1.73 1029 1.94 1100 2.14 1169 2.36 1235 2.57 1300 2.80 1362 3.00

Mo

del

TT

115

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP2,250 2,823 1,119 5.68 20 497 0.312,500 4,248 1,243 6.31 30 501 0.36 608 0.503,000 5,097 1,492 7.58 40 513 0.47 613 0.63 702 0.813,500 5,947 1,741 8.84 50 528 0.62 623 0.81 708 0.99 786 1.19 860 1.404,000 6,796 1,990 10.11 60 548 0.82 637 1.00 720 1.22 793 1.43 863 1.66 928 1.89 993 2.144,500 7,646 2,238 11.37 70 574 1.07 654 1.27 732 1.49 805 1.73 872 1.96 935 2.22 995 2.47 1053 2.73 1110 3.005,000 8,495 2,487 12.63 80 607 1.37 675 1.57 748 1.80 819 2.00 884 2.32 945 2.58 1003 2.86 1058 3.13 1112 3.425,500 9,345 2,736 13.90 90 645 1.74 703 1.94 767 2.18 833 2.45 897 2.73 957 3.00 1014 3.30 1068 3.60 1119 3.906,000 10,194 2,985 15.16 100 686 2.18 734 2.38 791 2.62 851 2.90 913 3.20 971 3.50 1027 3.81 1079 4.13 1130 4.44

Mo

del

TT

118

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP5,000 8,495 1,742 8.85 0 463 0.99 544 1.28 617 1.57 685 1.87 746 2.17 803 2.495,500 9,345 1,916 9.73 10 476 1.18 554 1.50 625 1.81 690 2.14 750 2.47 806 2.81 860 3.15 910 3.506,000 10,194 2,090 10.62 20 490 1.41 564 1.75 633 2.09 696 2.44 755 2.80 810 3.15 862 3.52 913 3.89 960 4.276,500 11,044 2,264 11.50 30 504 1.67 576 2.04 642 2.41 704 2.77 762 3.15 816 3.53 867 3.92 917 4.33 963 4.737,000 11,893 2,439 12.39 40 521 1.96 590 2.35 653 2.74 713 3.14 769 3.54 823 3.96 872 4.37 921 4.79 967 5.217,500 12,743 2,613 13.27 50 538 2.29 603 2.71 666 3.12 724 3.54 779 3.98 830 4.41 880 4.85 926 5.29 972 5.748,000 13,592 2,787 14.16 60 557 2.66 619 3.10 678 3.54 735 4.00 788 4.45 839 4.91 887 5.37 934 5.83 978 6.318,500 14,442 2,961 15.04 70 576 3.08 636 3.53 693 4.01 747 4.48 799 4.96 848 5.44 896 5.93 941 6.42 985 6.929,000 15,291 3,135 15.93 80 596 3.53 653 4.02 708 4.52 761 5.00 810 5.52 859 6.03 905 6.54 950 7.06 993 7.509,500 16,141 3,310 16.81 90 616 4.04 671 4.55 724 5.00 774 5.60 823 6.13 870 6.67 916 7.21 959 7.74 1001 8.29

10,000 16,990 3,484 17.70 100 638 4.60 690 5.14 741 5.68 789 6.22 837 6.78 883 7.34 926 7.91 970 8.47 1011 9.04

Mo

del

TT

212

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP3,600 6,116 1,250 6.35 20 609 0.554,000 6,796 1,388 7.05 30 617 0.64 741 0.874,400 7,476 1,527 7.76 40 627 0.76 746 1.00 852 1.244,800 8,155 1,666 8.46 50 641 0.87 754 1.15 858 1.41 953 1.695,200 8,835 1,805 9.17 60 656 1.03 763 1.31 864 1.59 956 1.895,600 9,514 1,944 9.88 70 673 1.20 775 1.49 872 1.79 962 2.10 1047 2.426,400 10,874 2,222 11.29 80 712 1.60 805 1.92 894 2.25 978 2.60 1058 2.95 1135 3.31 1208 3.677,200 12,233 2,500 12.70 90 759 2.11 841 2.45 922 2.81 1001 3.19 1077 3.57 1149 3.97 1219 4.37 1286 4.77 1250 5.188,000 13,592 2,777 14.11 100 808 2.74 881 3.09 956 3.47 1029 3.87 1100 4.29 1169 4.72 1235 5.45 1300 5.59 1362 6.05


25 of 198

Mo

del

TT

215

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP5,000 8,495 1,244 6.32 0 501 0.726,000 10,194 1,492 7.58 15 513 0.95 613 1.287,000 11,893 1,741 8.85 30 528 1.26 624 1.61 708 1.998,000 13,592 1,990 10.11 40 548 1.64 637 2.03 720 2.45 793 2.87 863 3.329,000 15,291 2,238 11.37 55 574 2.12 654 2.53 732 2.98 805 3.45 872 3.94 935 4.42 995 4.94

10,000 16,990 2,487 12.63 70 607 2.73 675 3.14 748 3.61 819 4.13 884 4.64 945 5.17 1003 5.72 1058 6.27 1112 6.8411,000 18,689 2,736 13.90 85 645 3.47 703 3.88 767 4.37 833 4.90 897 5.45 957 6.02 1014 6.60 1068 7.20 1119 7.8012,000 20,388 2,985 15.16 100 686 4.37 734 4.78 791 5.25 851 5.80 913 6.38 971 6.99 1027 7.62 1079 8.25 1130 8.89

Mo

del

TT

218

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP9,000 15,291 1,071 5.44 0 453 1.64 537 2.16 612 2.69

10,000 16,990 1,745 8.86 10 463 1.97 544 2.55 617 3.13 685 3.7311,000 18,689 1,920 9.75 20 476 2.37 554 3.00 625 3.63 690 4.27 750 4.9412,000 20,388 2,094 10.64 30 489 2.83 564 3.50 633 4.19 696 4.88 755 5.59 810 6.31 863 7.0413,000 22,087 2,269 11.53 40 504 3.34 576 4.06 642 4.80 704 5.55 762 6.31 816 7.07 867 7.85 917 8.6414,000 23,786 2,443 12.41 50 521 3.92 590 4.71 653 5.49 713 6.29 769 7.09 823 7.91 872 8.74 921 9.57 970 10.4215,000 25,485 2,618 13.30 60 538 4.59 603 5.41 666 6.26 724 7.10 779 7.95 830 8.82 880 9.70 926 10.55 973 11.3916,000 27,184 2,792 14.18 70 557 5.33 619 6.20 678 7.09 735 7.99 788 8.90 839 9.81 887 10.66 934 11.61 975 12.5517,000 28,883 2,967 15.07 80 576 6.15 636 7.08 693 8.02 747 8.97 799 9.93 848 10.87 896 11.82 941 12.77 985 13.8218,000 30,582 3,141 15.96 90 596 7.07 653 8.04 708 9.03 761 10.03 810 10.97 859 12.03 905 13.08 950 14.03 993 15.1620,000 33,980 3,490 17.73 100 638 9.19 690 10.27 741 11.29 789 12.45 837 13.50 883 14.66 926 15.72 970 16.88 1011 18.04

Mo

del

TT

221

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP10,000 16,990 1,278 6.49 0 382 1.53 458 2.0612,000 20,388 1,534 7.79 10 397 2.11 466 2.72 531 3.3514,000 23,786 1,790 9.09 20 415 2.85 480 3.54 540 4.26 595 4.99 648 5.7516,000 27,184 2,046 10.39 30 436 3.77 497 4.56 554 5.36 606 6.17 655 7.01 703 7.85 748 8.7218,000 30,582 2,301 11.69 40 460 4.91 516 5.78 570 6.67 619 7.57 667 8.49 711 9.41 754 10.35 795 11.29 837 12.2320,000 33,980 2,557 12.99 50 487 6.30 538 7.24 589 8.22 636 9.21 682 10.22 724 11.18 765 12.24 805 13.19 843 14.2422,000 37,378 2,813 14.29 60 517 7.97 563 8.98 610 10.03 654 11.08 697 12.13 739 13.29 779 14.35 817 15.51 853 16.6724,000 40,776 3,069 15.59 70 548 9.94 590 10.97 633 12.13 675 13.29 716 14.45 755 15.61 793 16.88 830 18.04 866 19.3126,000 44,174 3,324 16.89 80 619 13.29 658 14.56 697 15.72 736 16.99 774 18.36 810 19.62 846 20.89 881 22.2628,000 47,572 3,580 18.19 90 686 17.30 722 18.67 759 19.94 794 21.31 829 22.68 864 24.16 897 25.5330,000 50,970 3,836 19.49 100 714 20.57 749 21.94 783 23.32 817 24.79 850 26.16 883 27.64 915 29.22

Mo

del

TT

224

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP25,000 42,475 1,862 9.46 0 327 4.94 376 6.16 420 7.46 463 8.84 503 10.3227,000 45,873 2,011 10.22 10 338 5.79 384 7.09 426 8.45 467 9.89 506 11.39 544 12.98 580 14.6629,000 49,271 2,160 10.97 20 348 6.75 392 8.13 434 9.56 473 10.97 511 12.55 546 14.24 581 15.93 616 17.7231,000 52,669 2,309 11.73 30 359 7.83 402 9.31 442 10.76 480 12.34 516 13.93 551 15.61 584 17.41 617 19.20 650 21.1033,000 56,067 2,459 12.49 40 370 9.03 413 10.55 452 12.13 487 13.72 522 15.44 556 17.20 588 18.99 620 20.89 651 22.7935,000 59,465 2,608 13.25 50 423 11.92 461 13.61 496 15.30 530 17.09 593 18.88 593 20.68 624 22.68 654 24.5837,000 62,863 2,757 14.01 60 435 13.50 471 15.30 505 17.09 538 18.88 599 20.68 599 22.58 629 24.58 658 26.5939,000 66,261 2,906 14.76 70 481 17.09 515 18.99 546 20.78 606 22.79 606 24.69 635 26.69 663 28.8041,000 69,659 3,055 15.52 80 492 19.10 524 20.99 555 23.00 614 24.90 614 27.01 641 29.01 669 31.2343,000 73,057 3,204 16.28 90 535 23.21 565 25.21 622 27.32 622 29.43 649 31.54 675 33.7645,000 76,455 3,353 17.03 100 545 25.64 575 27.75 631 29.86 631 32.07 657 34.29 683 36.50


26 of 198

Mo

del

TT

230

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP30,000 50,970 1,612 8.19 0 252 4.86 298 6.35 339 8.0033,000 56,067 1,774 9.01 10 260 5.82 302 7.40 341 9.09 379 10.8736,000 61,164 1,935 9.83 20 267 6.93 307 8.61 345 10.38 381 12.24 415 14.2439,000 66,261 2,096 10.65 30 276 8.20 314 9.98 350 11.82 384 13.72 417 15.83 448 18.0442,000 71,358 2,258 11.47 40 285 9.62 322 11.50 357 13.40 388 15.51 420 17.62 450 19.94 479 22.26 507 24.7945,000 76,455 2,419 12.29 50 330 13.19 363 15.30 395 17.48 424 19.62 453 21.94 481 24.37 509 29.60 536 29.6448,000 81,553 2,580 13.11 60 339 15.19 370 17.41 401 19.62 429 21.94 457 24.27 484 26.80 511 29.33 537 32.0751,000 86,650 2,741 13.92 70 379 19.62 407 21.94 436 24.41 462 26.80 488 29.43 514 32.07 539 34.8254,000 91,747 2,903 14.75 80 387 22.16 415 24.58 442 27.11 468 29.69 493 32.28 518 35.03 542 37.7757,000 96,844 3,064 15.57 90 423 27.43 449 30.07 475 32.71 499 35.47 522 38.19 545 41.0460,000 101,941 3,225 16.38 100 431 30.49 457 33.23 481 36.08 505 38.82 529 41.76 550 44.63

Mo

del

TT

233

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP40,000 67,960 1,659 8.43 0 239 7.36 276 9.20 312 11.1543,000 73,057 1,784 9.06 8 246 8.53 282 10.50 315 12.45 347 14.6646,000 78,155 1,908 9.69 16 252 9.84 287 11.92 320 14.03 350 16.29 380 20.3649,000 83,252 2,033 10.33 25 258 11.29 293 13.50 324 15.72 353 18.07 382 20.5052,000 88,349 2,157 10.96 33 300 15.19 329 17.62 358 19.94 385 22.47 411 25.1455,000 93,446 2,282 11.59 41 306 17.09 335 19.62 363 22.16 389 24.77 415 27.44 440 30.2358,000 98,543 2,406 12.22 50 342 21.83 342 21.84 368 24.48 394 27.11 419 29.95 442 32.80 466 35.7661,000 103,640 2,531 12.86 58 348 24.27 373 27.01 399 29.85 423 32.60 446 35.55 468 38.62 492 41.6764,000 108,737 2,655 13.49 66 354 26.80 380 29.79 404 32.71 427 35.55 450 38.64 473 41.67 494 44.9167,000 113,834 2,780 14.12 75 361 29.65 386 32.71 410 35.76 433 38.82 455 41.88 476 45.05 497 48.3270,000 118,931 2,904 14.75 83 392 35.76 416 39.05 438 42.20 460 45.37 481 48.68 501 51.9173,000 124,028 3,029 15.39 91 400 39.21 422 42.52 444 45.79 465 49.17 485 52.43 505 55.9275,000 127,426 3,112 15.81 100 426 44.94 448 48.32 468 51.81 488 55.18 509 67.20

Mo

del

TT

236

AIRFLOW

CFM m3/h

Outlet Velocity

fpm m/s

Percent-age of

Capacity



1.00 in wc /2.49 mbar

1.25 in wc /3.11 mbar

1.50 in wc /3.74 mbar

1.75 in wc /4.36 mbar

2.00 in wc /4.98 mbar

2.25 in wc5.6 mbar

2.50 in wc6.23 mbar

RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP50,000 84,951 1,953 9.92 0 244 10.76 274 12.98 303 11.15 330 17.51 358 20.0253,000 90,048 2,070 10.52 8 250 12.24 281 14.66 308 12.45 334 19.38 360 21.89 385 24.5556,000 95,145 2,187 11.11 16 256 13.93 287 16.35 313 14.03 339 21.31 364 23.96 387 26.6559,000 100,242 2,304 11.70 25 293 18.36 320 15.72 344 23.55 368 26.16 391 28.97 414 31.8362,000 105,339 2,421 12.30 33 299 20.41 326 17.62 349 28.85 372 28.65 394 31.48 417 34.41 438 37.4665,000 110,436 2,539 12.90 41 332 19.62 356 28.44 378 31.23 399 34.18 420 37.14 441 40.30 462 43.5368,000 115,533 2,656 13.49 50 339 21.84 362 31.12 383 34.08 404 37.14 424 40.22 444 43.36 464 46.6371,000 120,630 2,773 14.09 58 345 24.27 367 34.08 389 37.14 409 40.29 429 43.46 448 46.63 468 50.0274,000 125,727 2,890 14.68 66 351 33.87 373 37.14 395 40.42 415 43.57 435 46.84 454 50.24 472 53.5977,000 130,824 3,007 15.28 75 381 40.41 401 43.78 421 47.16 440 50.60 458 54.02 476 57.4980,000 135,921 3,124 15.87 83 387 43.89 407 47.48 426 50.96 445 54.51 463 58.04 481 61.5183,000 141,018 3,242 16.47 91 394 47.69 414 51.38 433 54.97 452 58.67 468 62.30 486 65.9485,000 144,416 3,320 16.87 100 398 50.29 418 54.02 437 57.85 455 61.50 473 65.20 490 69.01

SECTION 6: LIFTING AN AIR HANDLER

27 of 198


The air handler must be installed in compliance with

all applicable codes. The qualified installer or service

technician must use best building practices when

installing the air handler and any optional equipment.

This appliance requires at least 4 CFM (6.8 m3/h) of

outside air per 1,000 Btu/h (.293 kW).

Before installation, check local distribution condition,

nature of gas and gas pressure, and the current state

of adjustment of the appliance are compatible. If

filters are not installed (via inlet hood or filter section),

an air strainer must be installed on the inlet of the air

handler with openings less than or equal to 5/8" (16

mm) in diameter. All air handlers mounted outdoors

must have outside air inlets installed in such a

manner that their lowest edge is 16" (406.4 mm)

above any surface. This applies to roof curbs, upright

stands and suspended air handlers.

6.1 Lifting an Air Handler

If the equipment arrives by Flat Bed truck:

Weather-Rite LLC strongly recommends using a

crane to unload the air hander. Lift the equipment

using the lifting lugs provided and spreader bars (by

others). Lift sections separately. See Page 29, Figure 24 through Page 29, Figure 25.

If the equipment arrives by an enclosed van style

trailer:

Air handler should be unloaded by a forklift with

proper weight capacity and a minimum of six foot

long forks. The equipment must be fork-lifted from

underneath and caution must be used to ensure that

the forks do not damage the underside of the air

hander.

Do not place air handler on the ground, but place on

timbers or other means to elevate until ready for

installation.

6.1.1 Preparing to Lift the Air Handler

Prior to lifting the air handler, the following steps must

be performed.

1. Remove all packaging or banding that attached

the air handler to the skid and ensure that the

air handler is no longer bound to the skid.

2. Remove all packaging or blockers.

3. Remove all of the accessories or packages that

were shipped on the same skid, inside the air

handler or inside the control enclosure.

4. Inspect the air handler to:

• Verify that there is no damage as a result of

shipping.

• Ensure that it is appropriately rated for the

utilities available at the installation site.

• Verify that the lifting lugs are intact,

undamaged and secured to the air handler.

• Ensure factory-installed hardware is

torqued as specified.

5. Prepare the installation location to be ready to

accept the air handler (i.e. roof curb or mount-

ing stand).

6. Verify that the lifting equipment can handle the

air handler’s weight and the required reach. For

air handlers weight, see appropriate tables on Page 12, Section 5.

6.1.2 Lifting a Horizontal Air Handler6.1.2.1 Reposition a Horizontal Air Handler Shipped Vertically

Models TT112 through TT218 are shipped vertically

on skids and must be turned into the proper position

for lifting into place.

The required equipment is an adjustable chain with

safety hooks and properly rated eyebolts (supplied

by others). An adjustable chain will allow the

offsetting of the length of the chain to compensate for

the difference in the weight. The side of the units with

the motor and mounted control panel is

approximately 30% heavier than the opposite side.

The following steps should be followed to properly

and safely reposition the air handler. Refer to Page 28, Figure 23.

1. Install eyebolts in location on air handler

labeled #1 and #2.

2. The offset hook labeled #2 is attached to the

eyebolt labeled #2. The offset or shorter chain

is always attached to the heavier side of the air

handler.

WARNING

Crush Hazard

Use proper lifting equipment and practices.



28 of 198

3. The hook labeled #1 is attached to the eyebolt

labeled #1.

4. Remove the lag bolts attaching the air handler

to the skid and discard.

5. Begin to lift slowly; readjustment of the offset

chain may be required. After unit is suspended

and free from the skid, remove the skid. The air

handler will be hanging at a slight angle.

6. Set the lowest edge down slowly on a protec-

tive surface such as plywood.

7. Continue to lower the air handler into the

proper position horizontally. The unit can now

be rigged for installation.

FIGURE 23: Reposition for Lifting TT112 - TT218

2

1

Example of chainLifting Ring

Adjustable Hooks

Lifting Hook WithSafety Locks

1

2

Lowest Corner

Lower

prevent damage.

Plywood

take the weight off tomech. means. Need to

Raise slightly by hand or


29 of 198

6.1.3 Lifting an Upright Air Handler

Lift the air handler into place using all four 0.75"

(1.9 cm) diameter lifting lugs on the unit base. Use

spreader bars to ensure that the lifting cables clear

the sides of the air handler. See Page 29, Figure 25.

Use caution as the load may be unbalanced. The air

handler must be kept level during the lift to prevent

tipping, twisting or falling. If lifted improperly, product

damage may occur.

If the air handler is shipped as two pieces, lift the two

pieces separately and then assemble. See Page 30, Section 7 for assembly instructions. Refer to the

applicable portions of Page 50, Section 10 through Page 55, Section 11 for assembly and mounting

instructions for specific accessories.

FIGURE 24: Lifting a Horizontal Air Handler

FIGURE 25: Lifting an Upright Air Handler

EYE-BOLT

NUT

WASHER

(HARDWARE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS)

EYE-BOLT

NUT

WASHER

(HARDWARE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS)


30 of 198

SECTION 7: AIR HANDLER ASSEMBLYAll air handlers, except the TT118 and the

recirculating TT233-TT236, have the blower and

burner shipped as one piece. No field assembly is

required. For TT118 and recirculating models TT233-

TT236 field assembly will be required.

To assemble, use the supplied hardware and bolt the

blower section to the burner section through pre-

drilled holes. Supplied hardware must be torqued to

recommended specifications on Page 10, Table 1.

For details, See Page 31, Figure 27.

On outdoor models, caulk (provided by others) the

sides, roof and bottom seams between the section

splits. Once caulk has been applied to outdoor

models TT233-TT236 (pitched roof is standard), the

provided roof seam cover should be screwed over

the caulked seam every 12" (30.5 cm) with the

provided screws. For outdoor model TT118, roof

seam cover is not required (unless pitched roof

option supplied). See Page 30, Table 28 for quantity

of screws required.

Table 28: Roof Seam Cover Drill Screws

FIGURE 26: Air Handler Assembly - Horizontal/Upright (Model TT118)

ModelQuantity of Drill Screws per

Section for Seam CoverTT233 & TT236 14

TYPICAL FOR ALL CONNECTIONS

BOLTFLAT WASHER

FLAT WASHERLOCK WASHER

NUT

BLOWER SECTION

FILTER/BURNER SECTION

Model Quantity of Nuts, Bolts, Flat/Lock Washers

118

BURNER/FILTERSECTION

BLOWERSECTION

HORIZONTAL UPRIGHT

14 Sets

SECTION 7: AIR HANDLER ASSEMBLY

31 of 198

FIGURE 27: Air Handler Assembly - Recirculating Horizontal (Models TT233 and TT236)


BOLTFLAT WASHER

FLAT WASHERLOCK WASHERNUT

TYPICAL ROOF SEAM DETAIL

CAULK END OF SEAM & AT INTERSECTIONS

SEAM STRIP

PITCHED ROOF (REF)

INSTALL DRILL SCREWS APPROX. 1" FROM EACH ENDTO SECURE SEAM STRIP TO ROOF CONNECTING FLANGES

BLOWER SECTION

BURNER SECTION

ModelQuantity of 1/2" Nuts,

Bolts, Flat/Lock WashersTT233 14 sets

TT236 14 sets


32 of 198

FIGURE 28: Air Handler Assembly - Recirculating Upright (Models TT233 and TT236)

LOCK WASHERFLAT WASHER

FLAT WASHER

BLOWERSECTION

BURNERSECTION


NUT

BOLT

Model Quantity of 1/2" Nuts, Bolts, Flat/Lock Washers

TT233 14 sets

TT236 14 sets

SECTION 8: VIBRATION ISOLATION

33 of 198

SECTION 8: VIBRATION ISOLATIONVibration isolation isolates the support / mounting structure / building from vibrations that the air handler

equipment may generate. The type of isolation is determined by the application and or specifications of the

equipment on order. The factory will select the appropriate sizing for the isolators.

There are three different types of vibration isolators available - Pad, Neoprene or Spring. Pad isolators are

typically used for curb-mounted units. Neoprene and Spring can be used for suspension via hanger rod or

pad mounted installation. Neoprene style is normally selected when noise and vibration are to be

considered. Spring style is normally selected when only vibration is considered.

8.1 Pad Isolator for Curb-Mounted Air Handler

The pad supplied is 2" (5.1 cm) wide by 15" (38.1 cm) long. See Page 33, Figure 29. This is a resilient cross

ribbed neoprene pad with a high deflection rate. Alternatively raised ribs provide effective isolation in both

high and low load ranges. The equipment can be properly isolated with use these strips placed on a

standard factory-supplied curb.

FIGURE 29: Pad Isolator

8.1.1 Installation Instructions for Pad Isolator for Curb-Mounted Air Handlers1. Lay strips on the top surface of the curb. See Page 34, Figure 30.

2. Hold in place with tape, such as masking or duct.

3. Trim as needed to cover the perimeter of the curb.

4. Lift and place the air handler on top of curb.


34 of 198

FIGURE 30: Pad Isolator Installation

Unit

Waffle Pad Isolator

2" (5.08 cm) x 2" (5.08 cm)

Curb Angle

Curb

C-Channel

(Check Unit Dimensions

For More Detail)

2” Duct Flange or Case


35 of 198

8.2 Neoprene or Spring Isolators for Hanging-Mounted Air Handler

The hanger style isolator, available in neoprene or

spring, and is used to suspend the air handler from

any overhead support. (i.e. hanger rod) It is supplied

with a rectangular steel housing which incorporates

the neoprene element or spring. See Page 35, Figure 31. The design permits either the housing to be

bolted directly to the ceiling or support structure or to

be suspended from hanger rods (sized and supplied

by the installer along with all hardware).

FIGURE 31: Hanging Isolator Variations

All hardware, which include nuts, washers and

hanger rods are to be supplied by the installer.

1. Equipment should be hung at its proper eleva-

tion by using temporary fixtures that can be

removed after vibration isolators are installed

and adjusted.

2. Isolators may be fastened directly to the struc-

ture or inserted in the hanger rods. See Page 35, Figure 32. For best results, isolators should

be located at or near the ceiling.

3. Install isolators.

4. Turn nut on lower rod assembly clockwise on

complete turn on each isolator. Repeat this

procedure until temporary hanging fixtures are

loose and load of the equipment is suspended

completely on the vibration isolators. See Page 37, Figure 34.

5. Remove temporary hanger fixtures and level

equipment by taking additional turns on the

lower isolator rod nut clockwise to raise, coun-

terclockwise to lower, as required.

NOTE: It is recommended on models TT112-TT218,

that the hanger rod pass through the upper support

flange and attach to the lower support flange. See Page 36, Figure 33. It is recommended on model

TT221, that the hanger rod pass through the upper

support tube and attach to the lower support tube,

See Page 37, Figure 34. It is recommended on

models TT224-TT236, that the hanger rod pass

through the upper and lower flange of the structural

base and attach to the lower flange. See Page 38, Figure 35.

FIGURE 32: Hanger Isolator

NEOPRENE SPRING

ROOF STRUCTURE


36 of 198

FIGURE 33: Hanger Rods’ Installation instructions (Model TT112-TT218)

LOCK WASHER

(HARDWARE BY OTHERS)NUT

FLAT WASHER


37 of 198

FIGURE 34: Hanger Rods’ Installation (Model TT221)


(HARDWARE BY OTHERS)


38 of 198

FIGURE 35: Hanger Rods’ Installation Instructions (Model TT224-TT236)

NUTLOCK WASHERFLAT WASHER

(HARDWARE BY OTHERS)


39 of 198

8.3 Neoprene or Spring Isolators for Pad-Mounted Air Handlers

The pad style isolator, which is available in either a

neoprene version or spring version, is used to

support the air handler from a base pad or structural

frame.

8.3.1 Neoprene Mount Isolator

The neoprene mount isolator is a single piece

structure in a rectangular steel housing designed to

be bolted directly to the bottom support base of the

air handler equipment and the pad or base it rests

on. See Page 39, Figure 36. Neoprene style is

normally selected when the equipment requires up to

½" (12.7 mm) of static deflection.

FIGURE 36: Pad Mounting of Neoprene Isolator

8.3.1.1 Installation Instructions for Neoprene Mount Isolator

All hardware required to mount the isolator to the

structure is to be supplied by the installer.

1. Install blockers under the air handler equip-

ment to allow the isolator to be slid into place.

2. Place the isolator between the structure and

support base of the air handler.

3. Bolt the base of the isolator securely to the

structure.

4. Secure equipment with an adjusting bolt pass-

ing through the base of the air handler and

screw it into the isolator. See Page 40, Figure 37.


40 of 198

FIGURE 37: Pad Mounting Installation Instructions for Neoprene Isolator (Models TT112-TT218)


41 of 198

FIGURE 38: Pad Mounting Installation Instructions for Neoprene Isolator (Model TT221)


42 of 198

FIGURE 39: Pad Mounting Installation Instructions for Neoprene Isolator (Models TT224-TT236)


43 of 198

8.3.2 Spring Mount Isolator

The spring mount isolator includes a rectangular

steel housing which incorporates the spring and load

tensioning adjustment bolt. It is equipped with

neoprene stabilizers to provide lateral control without

binding. See Page 43, Figure 40. Spring style is

normally selected when the equipment requires up to

1" (25.4 cm) in deflection.

FIGURE 40: Pad Mounting of Spring Isolator

8.3.2.1 Installation Instructions for Spring Mount Isolator

All hardware required to mount the isolator to the

structure is to be supplied by the installer.

1. Place the spring mount between the structure

and support base of the air handler. The spring

mount housing serves as the blocking during

erection.

2. Bolt the base of the isolator securely to the

structure.

3. Secure equipment with adjustment bolt pass-

ing through the base of the air handler.

4. Adjust the isolator to ensure the spring pres-

sure plate is a minimum ¼" (6.35 mm) above

the lower housing and no more than ½" (12.7

mm) above the lower housing. See Page 44, Figure 41.


44 of 198

FIGURE 41: Pad Mounting Installation Instructions for Spring Isolator (Models TT112-TT218)


45 of 198

FIGURE 42: Pad Mounting Installation Instructions for Spring Isolator (Model TT221)


46 of 198

FIGURE 43: Pad Mounting Installation Instructions for Spring Isolator (Model TT224-TT236)

SECTION 9: ROOF CURB

47 of 198


Roof curbs support roof mounted horizontal air

handlers and accessory sections, roof curbs are

available in 24" (61.0 cm).

Roof curbs are shipped knocked down and require

field assembly. Note: Before installation, verify that

you have the correct roof curb and that all required

components are present. If any are missing, contact

your WEATHER-RITE™ independent representative.

9.1 Roof Curb Assembly and Installation

Assemble roof curb according to the assembly

drawing on Page 48, Figure 44. Supplied hardware

must be torqued to recommended specifications on Page 10, Table 1.

Place the curb on the roof in the position in which it

will be installed. Check that the diagonal

measurements are within 1/8"(3 mm) of each other.

To ensure a weatherproof seal between the air

handler and the curb, the curb must be level with no

twist from end to end. Shim level as required and

secure curb to roof deck using best building

practices. The curb is self-flashing. Install roofing

material as required.

NOTE: Check the installation location to ensure

proper clearances to combustibles and clearance for

access. See Page 10, Section 3.1.

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard

Use proper safety equipment and prac-tices to avoid falling.

Severe Injury Hazard

Use proper lifting practices and equip-ment.

Equipment and accessories are heavy.

Cut/Pinch Hazard

Wear protective gear during installation, operation and service.

Edges are sharp.

WARNING



48 of 198

FIGURE 44: Roof Curb

Table 29: Roof Curb Dimensions

*The length indicated by dimension “B1” is for a roof curb designed to support the burner and blower sections. The length indicated

by dimension “B2” is for a roof curb designed to support the burner, blower and filter sections.

C

B1/B2 A

DNOTES:

1. Curb is shipped unassembled.

2. All dimensions are outside dimensions.

3. Curb material is galvanized steel of 14ga to

12ga based on model.

4. Nuts and bolts are (3/8" x 1") are furnished.

5. Caulk (by others) all joints before assembling.

6. Seam in roof curb for models TT224, TT230, TT233 and TT236.

7. When measuring dimensions A and B1/B2, include the top mounting flange on both sides.

8. Ductwork should not be installed flush with the top of the curb. See Figure 30

ModelWidth

LengthDepth

Bottom Flange Height

WeightBurner/Blower

Filter Section

Burner/Blower

Filter Section

A B1 B2 C D 16" 24" 16" 24"

TT112in

cm

NO

N-R

EC

IRC

UL

AT

ING

35.2

89.4

57.2

145.3

81.2

206.2

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

75

34.0

115

52.2

98

44.5

150

68.0

TT115in

cm35.2

89.4

57.2

145.3

81.2

206.2

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

75

34.0

115

52.2

98

44.5

150

68.0

TT118in

cm59.2

150.4

89.2

226.6

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.624.0

lbkg

N/A N/A100

45.4

130

59.0

TT212in

cm59.2

150.4

57.2

145.3

81.2

206.2

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

100

45.4

154

69.9

130

59.0

169

76.7

TT215in

cm71.2

180.8

57.2

145.3

85.2

216.4

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

125

56.7

192

87.1

163

73.9

212

96.2

TT218in

cm71.2

180.8

61.2

155.4

85.2

216.4

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

150

68.0

231

104.8

195

88.5

254

115.2

TT221in

cm99.2

252.0

71.2

180.8

97.2

246.9

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

14.0

61.0

lbkg

200

90.7

308

139.7

260

117.9

338

153.3

TT224in

cm109.0

276.9

99.0

251.5

125.0

317.5

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

300

136.1

462

209.6

390

176.9

507

230.0

TT230in

cm144.0

365.8

99.0

251.5

125.0

317.5

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

375

170.1

577

261.7

488

221.4

635

288.0

TT233in

cm159.0

403.9

109.0

276.9

135.0

342.9

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

500

226.8

769

348.8

650

294.8

845

383.3

TT236in

cm179.0

454.7

109.0

276.9

135.0

342.9

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

500

226.8

769

348.8

650

294.8

845

383.3

TT233in

cm

RE

CIR

CU

LAT

ING

159.0

403.9

145.0

368.3

171.0

434.3

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

665

301.6

1024

464.5

865

392.4

1125

510.3

TT236in

cm179.0

454.7

145.0

368.3

171.0

434.3

1.9

4.8

3.0

7.6

16.0

40.6

24.0

61.0

lbkg

665

301.6

1024

464.5

865

392.4

1125

510.3


49 of 198

9.2 Air Handler Mounting to Roof Curb

After the curb has been installed, the air handler may

be placed on the curb. There must be a 1/8" (.3 cm) x

2" (5.1 cm) neoprene closed cell, adhesive-back

gasket (supplied by others) between the top of the

curb and the base surface of the air handler to

prevent moisture from leaking into the building from

either driving rains or melting snow.

The installer is responsible for tying the air handler to

the curb per all applicable codes. See Page 49, Figure 45 for details.

FIGURE 45: Installation of Legs

WEATHER-RITE UNIT

BOLT LEGS TO THE SECTIONTHRU THE LIFTING LUGS.1/2" 13NC X 1.5" BOLTS.

DRILL SCREW MOUNTINS LEGTO UNDERSIDE OF SECTION.

AMODEL

28.000 TT 112, 115, 212, 215

36.00042.000

TT 218TT 221

30.000 TT 11836.000

B

36.00036.000

36.000

DIMENSIONS

6.000

10.250

"A"

SECTION A-A

LAG BOLT HOLES FOR FLOOR MOUNTING.

WEATHER-RITE UNIT

DRILL SCREW LEGS INTO SIDE OF CABINET.

DRILL SCREW CROSSMEMBER TO LEGS.

"B"

9.500

1.500 (TYP)

9.000

6.0002.500

9.500

4.334

4.019

AA


50 of 198

SECTION 10: UPRIGHT STAND

10.1 Upright Stand

A stand can be used on an upright air handler which

will be installed on a concrete slab or on the floor. For

models TT112 - TT221 stand height is 36" (91.4 cm);

for model TT224 stand height is 46" (116.8 cm); for

model TT230 stand height is 47" (119.4 cm); for

models TT233 and TT236 stand height is 55" (139.7

cm). The stand must first be fastened to the concrete

slab or floor before the air handler is mounted upon

it.

10.2 Upright Stand Installation

To attach the stand to a concrete slab, it must be

secured with the use of studs embedded in the

concrete. Four studs must be installed in the slab,

one for each corner of the stand. Quantity 4,

maximum size 3/4" (19.1 cm) For models TT112 -

TT218, the mounting holes are to be field-drilled for

installation of the studs. For models TT224 - TT236,

the stand has four 3/4"(19.1 cm) holes drilled through

the stand pads. See Page 54, Figure 49. A stud

(provided by others) must be installed in the slab for

each hole. Fasten the stand to the slab with four hex

nuts with flat and lock washers (provided by others).

10.3 Attaching Air Handler to Stand

Once the stand is secured to a concrete slab, the air

handler may be placed on the stand. Prior to lifting

the air handler, apply a ½" (1.27 cm) thick double-

sided urethane foam tape (provided by others) to the

top edge of the stand. Lift the air handler on to the

mounting stand. See Page 27, Section 6.1 for safe

lifting practices. Once the air handler is placed on the

stand, secure it with the provided hardware per

recommended torque settings. See Page 10, Section 1 After placing the air handler on the mounting stand,

seams between the mounting stand and the air

handler must be properly caulked (caulk provided by

others).

NOTE: If using the filter section with the upright air

handler and stand, the filter section must be set down

onto the stand before the air handler is mounted on

the stand. The 1/2" (1.27 cm) thick double-sided

urethane foam tape should be applied between the

stand and the filter section.

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard





Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

WARNING



51 of 198

FIGURE 46: Upright Stand Detail

Model A B C Weight

TT112 &TT115

in cm

36.0 91.4

36.0 91.4

28.0 71.1

lb kg

125 56.7

TT118in

cm36.0 91.4

60.0 152.4

30.0 76.2

lb kg

140 63.5

TT212in

cm36.0 91.4

60.0 152.4

28.0 71.1

lb kg

140 63.5

TT215in

cm36.0 91.4

72.0 182.9

28.0 71.1

lb kg

150 68.0

TT218in

cm36.0 91.4

72.0 182.9

36.0 91.4

lb kg

160 72.6

TT221in

cm36.0 91.4

100.0 254.0

42.0 106.7

lb kg

175 79.4

TT224in

cm46.0

116.8110.0 279.4

55.0 139.7

lb kg

300 136.1

TT230in

cm47.0

119.4145.0 368.3

60.0 152.4

lb kg

425 192.8

TT233in

cm55.0

139.7160.0 406.4

72.0 182.9

lb kg

700 317.5

TT236in

cm55.0

139.7180.0 457.2

72.0 182.9

lb kg

700 317.5

C

A

B


52 of 198

FIGURE 47: Attaching Air Handler to Mounting Stand (TT112-TT221)

Quantity of 1/2" Nuts, Bolts, Flat/Lock Washers

115118212215

112

Model

4

444

221 4218

44

Connecting Point(TYP Both Sides)


BOLTFLAT WASHER



53 of 198

FIGURE 48: Attaching Air Handler to Mounting Stand (TT224-TT236)

Connecting Point(TYP Both Sides)

17178

236

230233

8224

Model Quantity of 1/2" Nuts, Bolts, Flat/Lock Washers


BOLTFLAT WASHER



54 of 198

FIGURE 49: Stand Mounting Hole Detail for Floor/Slab (Models TT221-TT236)

B

AShort Sides of

Air Handler

Long Sides of Air Handler

Model A B

TT221(in)

(cm)43.5

110.5

101.5

257.8

TT224(in)

(cm)53.5

135.9

113.0

287.0

TT230(in)

(cm)58.5

148.6

151

383.5

TT233(in)

(cm)70.5

179.1

166

421.6

TT236(in)

(cm)70.5

179.1

186

472.4

SECTION 11: VERTICAL MOUNTING LEGS

55 of 198

SECTION 11: VERTICAL MOUNTING LEGS

Legs can be used when mounting an air handler on a

concrete slab or directly on the floor. Legs are

available for models TT112 - TT221 in the upright

configuration.They cannot be used if the optional

inlet damper is supplied. See Page 55, Figure 50.

11.1 Attaching Legs to Air Handler

Legs must first be fastened to the air handler before

attaching them to the concrete slab or floor. To attach

the 36" (91.4 cm) legs to the air handler, the air

handler must first be lifted using the provided lifting

lugs. See Page 27, Figure 6 for safe lifting practices.

The legs can now be mounted one at a time to each

outside corner by utilizing hardware listed on Page 56, Figure 51 and supplied with the legs. Place the

leg on the outside corner and attach with the

previously listed hardware. Each bolt location must

have hardware installed. Once the legs are mounted

in place, cross members must be attached. See

Page 56, Figure .

NOTE: If using a filter section with upright air handler

and mounting legs, the mounting legs must be

attached to the filter section using the same

techniques listed previously. The ½" (1.27 cm) thick

double-sided urethane foam tape should be applied

between the air handler and the filter section.

11.2 Attaching Legs to Slab

To attach the legs to a concrete slab, or floor, the

base of each leg is equipped with two ¾" holes.

Studs (provided by others) must be installed in the

concrete slab, or floor.

The air handler may now be placed down over the

slab studs. The legs should then be bolted down

using nuts, lock and flat washers.

FIGURE 50: Mounting Leg Dimensions (TT112 - TT218)

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard





Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

WARNING


A

BC

Model A B CHardware

Qty.Weight

TT112 &TT115

in cm

36.0

91.4

9.5

24.1

26.0

66.028.0

lb kg

70

31.8

TT118in

cm

36.0

91.4

9.5

24.1

30.0

76.2 28.0lb kg

70

31.8

TT212 &TT215

in cm

36.0

91.4

9.5

24.1

26.0

66.028.0

lb kg

70

31.8

TT218in

cm

36.0

91.4

9.5

24.1

33.0

83.828.0

lb kg

70

31.8


56 of 198

FIGURE 51: Mounting Legs Installation Instructions

WEATHER-RITE UNIT

BOLT LEGS TO THE SECTIONTHRU THE LIFTING LUGS.1/2" 13NC X 1.5" BOLTS.

DRILL SCREW MOUNTINS LEGTO UNDERSIDE OF SECTION.

AMODEL

28.000 TT 112, 115, 212, 215

36.00042.000

TT 218TT 221

30.000 TT 11836.000

B

36.00036.000

36.000

DIMENSIONS

6.000

10.250

"A"

SECTION A-A

LAG BOLT HOLES FOR FLOOR MOUNTING.

WEATHER-RITE UNIT

DRILL SCREW LEGS INTO SIDE OF CABINET.

DRILL SCREW CROSSMEMBER TO LEGS.

"B"

9.500

1.500 (TYP)

9.000

6.0002.500

9.500

4.334

4.019

AA

SECTION 12: FILTER SECTION

57 of 198


All filter sections are shipped assembled. The TT118 filter section is an integral part of the burner section.

NOTE: Check to be sure that all required components are present. If any are missing, contact your

WEATHER-RITE™ independent distributor.

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard





Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

WARNING



58 of 198

12.1 Filter Section Installation - Horizontal Air Handlers

For installation directly onto the inlet of the air handler, use the supplied hardware and bolt the filter section to

the air handler through the pre-drilled holes. Supplied hardware must be torqued to recommended

specifications on Page 10, Table 1. On outdoor models, caulk (provided by others) both mating surfaces, roof

and bottom seams between the section splits. Once caulk has been applied to outdoor models TT224-

TT236 (pitched roof is standard), provided roof seam cover should be screwed over the caulked seam every

12" (30.5 cm) with the provided screws. See Page 30, Table 28 for quantity of screws required. Verify that the

factory installed filters are properly placed and filter access door is secured in the closed position. For details

See Page 58, Figure 52.

FIGURE 52: Filter Section Installation on Horizontal Air Handler

TYPICAL FOR ALL CONNECTIONS(Amount of hardware varies per unit size)

BOLT

FLAT WASHER


NUT

Hardware Size

1/4"1/4"

1/2"1/4"

1/2"1/2"

Model

218

224-230233-236

112-115118-215

221

ModelQuantity of 1/4" Nuts, Bolts,

Flat/Lock WashersTT112 & TT115

6 sets

TT118 N/A

TT212 8 sets

TT215 &TT218

14 sets


Flat/Lock WashersTT221 6 sets

TT224 6 sets

TT230 14 sets

TT233 14 sets

TT236 14 sets


59 of 198

12.2 Filter Section Installation - Upright Air Handlers

For installation directly onto the inlet of the air handler, use the supplied hardware and bolt the filter section to

the air handler through pre-drilled holes. If the air handler and filter section are to be set on a stand, mount

the filter section to the stand first and then install the air handler. (See Page 47, Section 9 for proper stand

mounting). Supplied hardware must be torqued to recommended specifications on Page 10, Table 1. Caulk

(provided by others) both mating surfaces between the filter section and air handler. Verify that the factory

installed filters are properly placed and filter access door is secured in the closed position. For details See Page 59, Figure 53.

FIGURE 53: Filter Section Installation on Upright Air Handler

TYPICAL FOR ALL CONNECTIONS(Amount of hardware varies per unit size)

BOLT

FLAT WASHER


NUT

BLOWER/BURNERSECTION

FILTER SECTION(OPTIONAL)

221218

224-230233-236

112-115118-215

Model Quantity of Nuts, Bolts, Flat/Lock WashersSIZE

1/2"1/4"

1/2"1/2"

1/4"1/4"

614

1414

108


60 of 198

SECTION 13: INLET HOODS

Inlet hoods are available with permanent filters or bird screen mounted on the inlet face.

For models TT112 - TT215, inlet hoods are shipped as one piece. For models TT218 and TT221 the inlet

hood is shipped in two pieces. For models TT224 and TT230, inlet hoods are shipped as five pieces. For

models TT233 and TT236 are shipped in two sections.

The inlet hood may be installed either onto the inlet of the air handler or to an outside wall. After installing an

inlet hood, all hardware must be tightened with a torque wrench to recommended specifications on Page 10, Table 1. In addition, all seams must be caulked (supplied by others).

NOTE: Bird screen ships loose for field installation on the face of the inlet hood as the final step of assembly.

See pages 61, 62 and 64 for installation details.

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard





Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

WARNING



61 of 198

13.1 Inlet Hood Installation (Models TT112 - TT215)

Inlet hoods for models TT112 - TT215 are shipped in one piece. To install the inlet hood on the cabinet of the

air handler, use the supplied hardware. See Page 61, Figure 54.

To install the inlet hood on an exterior wall, drill holes every 8" (20.3 cm) in the flanges of the inlet hood and

mount with lag bolts (supplied by others). Caulking is required on both mating surfaces.

FIGURE 54: Inlet Hood Installation to Air Handler (Models TT112 - TT215)

FLAT WASHER

TYPICAL FOR ALL CONNECTIONSNUT

LOCK WASHER

FLAT WASHER

BOLT

Bird screen attaches toface of inlet hood.


62 of 198

13.2 Inlet Hood Assembly (Models TT218 and TT221)

Inlet hoods for standard TT218 and TT221 are shipped in two pieces. To install the inlet hood on the cabinet

of the air handler, use the supplied hardware. See Page 62, Figure 55.


mount with lag bolts (supplied by others). Caulking is required on both mating surfaces.

FIGURE 55: Inlet Hood Assembly and Installation to Air Handler (Models TT218 and TT221)

FLAT WASHER

TYPICAL FOR ALL CONNECTIONSNUT

LOCK WASHER

FLAT WASHER

BOLT

Bird screen attaches toface of inlet hood.






63 of 198

13.3 Inlet Hood Installation (Models TT224 and TT230)

Inlet hoods for standard TT224 and TT230 are shipped in five pieces. To install the inlet hood on the cabinet

of the air handler, use the supplied hardware. See Page 63, Step 13.3.1.


mount with lag bolts (supplied by others). Caulking is required on all mating surfaces.

Step 13.3.1

Drill Screws

Step 1: Use supplied drill screws to

fasten two large pieces together.


64 of 198

Step 13.3.2

Step 13.3.3

Lock Washerand Washer

Washer

1/2" Nut

1/2" Bolt

Caulk mating surfaces

Birdscreen attached toface of inlet hood.

ModelQuantity of 1/2" Nuts,

Bolts, Flat/Lock WashersTT224TT230

8 sets

10 sets

Step 1: Attach assembly

made on Page 63, Step 13.3.1 to inlet section of

air handler using

supplied hardware.

Drill Screws


Step 1: Use supplied drill

screws to fasten the smaller

two pieces together.


65 of 198

Step 13.3.4

Drill Screws


Step 1: Use supplied drill screws to attach assembly made on Page 64, Step 13.3.3 to the larger section

of the inlet hood that was attached to the air handler on Page 64, Step 13.3.2.


66 of 198

Step 13.3.5

Step 13.3.6

NOTE: This view shown with half of the hood hidden to show support.

Drill Screws

Step 1: Drill screw factory supplied hood support channel through side of support and side flanges of

inlet hood.

NOTE: This view shown with half of the hood hidden to show support.

Step 1: Drill screw factory supplied hood support to bottom flange at base of unit.


67 of 198

13.4 Inlet Hood Installation (Models TT233 and TT236)

Inlet hoods for standard TT233 - TT236 are shipped in two sections. To install the inlet hood on the cabinet

of the air handler, use the supplied hardware. See Page 67, Figure 56.

To install the inlet hood sections on an exterior wall, drill holes every 8" (20.3 cm) in the flanges of the inlet

hood and mount with lag bolts (supplied by others).

FIGURE 56: Inlet Hood Installation to Air Handler (Models TT233 and TT236)

Final assembly of inlet hood is not complete until bird

screen, which shipped loose with the air handler, is

installed. See pages 61, 62 and 64.



Flat/Lock Washers

TT233in

cm16 sets

TT236in

cm20 sets


68 of 198

SECTION 14: SERVICE PLATFORM

All service platforms are shipped assembled and attached. Upright air handlers supplied with both a stand

and a service platform will have the service platform factory-mounted as an integral part of the stand.

Service platform for all standard horizontal units (models TT112 - TT236) are bolted or welded to the burner/

blower section depending on the application. For recirculating models TT233 and TT236, please refer to

submittal drawings for specific details.

See Page 69, Figure 57 for layout and dimensions.

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard





Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

WARNING


SECTION 14: SERVICE PLATFORM

69 of 198

FIGURE 57: Service Platform

Table 30: Service Platform

NOTE: Service platform will be located on the same side as the control panel. *Dimension "B" only applies to

service platforms on upright units. For horizontal units, dimension "B" can be determined by adding the

length of the units sections together. OSHA approved ladder and stairs by others.

Model A B* C Weight

TT112 &TT115

in cm

48.0

121.9

36.0

91.4

42.0

106.7

lb kg

400

181.4

TT118 & TT212

in cm

48.0

121.9

60.0

152.4

42.0

106.7

lb kg

400

181.4

TT215 & TT218

in cm

48.0

121.9

72.0

182.9

42.0

106.7

lb kg

480

217.7

TT221in

cm48.0

121.1

100.0

254.0

42.0

106.7

lb kg

520

235.9

TT224in

cm72.0

182.9

55.0

139.7

42.0

106.7

lb kg

300

136.1

TT230in

cm72.0

182.9

60.0

152.4

42.0

106.7

lb kg

425

192.8

TT233 & TT236

in cm

72.0

182.9

72.0

182.9

42.0

106.7

lb kg

700

317.5

Upright Unit / Models TT224 through TT236

Upright Unit /Models TT112 through TT221

Horizontal Unit / All Models

C

B

A


70 of 198

SECTION 15: DAMPERS

15.1 Discharge Damper Installation

Discharge dampers are either factory mounted to the air handler or shipped loose. No assembly is required

for factory mounted discharge dampers. Shipped loose discharge dampers are designed for mounting to the

cabinet of the air handler (covering the discharge opening) or to an interior wall. On a down-blast rooftop unit

it is recommended that a discharge damper be installed below the roof line for optimal access to the

discharge damper actuator(s). The installation instructions are the same whether it is a horizontal or upright

air handler.

The discharge damper has four outward-turned flanges.

To install the discharge damper to the cabinet of the air handler, drive drill screws through the flanges into the

air handler cabinet every 8" (20.5 cm) on all four sides of the discharge damper. See Page 71, Figure 58

which shows discharge damper for horizontal bottom arrangement.

To install the discharge damper on an interior wall, drill holes every 8" (20.5 cm) in the flanges on all four

sides of the discharge dampers to accommodate lag bolts (supplied by others). See Page 71, Table 31 for

recommended quantity of lag bolts to be installed.

Low leak discharge dampers shall be installed min. 48" down stream of the unit's outlet to avoid damage to

the damper seals.

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard





Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

WARNING


SECTION 15: DAMPERS

71 of 198

FIGURE 58: Discharge Damper

Table 31: Lag Bolts

15.2 Inlet Damper Installation

Inlet dampers are either factory mounted to the air handler or shipped loose. No assembly is required for

factory mounted inlet dampers. Shipped loose inlet dampers are designed for mounting to the face of the air

handler (covering the inlet opening) or to an exterior wall. The installation instructions are the same whether

it is a horizontal or upright air handler.

The inlet damper has four outward-turned flanges.

To install the inlet damper to the face of the air handler, drive drill screws through the flanges into the air

handler cabinet every 8" (20.5 cm) on all four sides of the inlet damper for models TT112 - TT218. For model

TT221 - TT236 use bolts. See Page 72, Figure 59 for details.

To install the inlet damper on an exterior wall, drill holes every 8" (20.3 cm) in the flanges on all four sides of

the inlet dampers to accommodate lag bolts (supplied by others). See Page 71, Table 31 for recommended

quantity of lag bolts to be installed.

DRILL SCREWS(SUPPLIED BY OTHERS)

Quantity of 1/4" Drill ScrewsModel

112-115118-212 10

8

221215-218

233-236224-230

12141414

Model Quantity of Lag Bolts RecommendedTT112 & TT115 18

TT118 & TT212 20

TT215 & TT218 20

TT221 28

TT224 32

TT230 34

TT233 36

TT236 52


72 of 198

FIGURE 59: Inlet Damper

Drill Screws or Lag Bolts (supplied by others)

SECTION 16: DISCHARGE PLENUM AND DISCHARGE LOUVERS

73 of 198

SECTION 16: DISCHARGE PLENUM AND DISCHARGE LOUVERS

16.1 Four-Way Discharge Plenum Installation

All discharge heads are shipped assembled. The discharge head is designed for mounting to the cabinet of

the air handler (covering the discharge opening) or to supply duct (duct by contractor). The discharge head

has four outward-turned flanges. To install discharge head to the cabinet of the air handler or supply duct,

drive sheet metal screws or pop rivets (supplied by others) through the flanges into the air handler or supply

cabinet every 8" (20.5 cm) on all four sides of the discharge head. In this type of installation, the discharge

head must be field-supported.


FIGURE 60: Four-Way Discharge Plenum

Crush Hazard


Falling Hazard





Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

WARNING


B

A

C

Model A B C Weight

TT112 - TT118

in cm

19.5

49.5

26.0

66.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

80

36.3

TT212in

cm

19.5

49.5

50.0

127.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

80

36.3

TT215in

cm

19.5

49.5

50.0

127.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

105

47.6

TT218in

cm

26.0

66.0

58.0

147.3

24.0

61.0

lb kg

140

63.5

TT221in

cm

33.0

83.8

76.0

193.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

270

122.5

TT224in

cm

35.0

88.9

90.0

228.6

24.0

61.0

lb kg

385

174.6

TT230in

cm

40.0

101.6

115.0

292.1

24.0

61.0

lb kg

410

186.0

TT233 & TT236

in cm

43.0

109.2

133.0

337.8

24.0

61.0

lb kg

510

231.3


74 of 198

16.2 Double Deflection Discharge Louver Installation

All discharge louvers are shipped assembled. The discharge louvers are designed for mounting to the

cabinet of the air handler (covering the discharge opening) or to an interior wall. To install the discharge

louvers to the cabinet of the air handler, drive sheet metal screws or pop rivets (supplied by others) through

the flanges into the air handler cabinet every 8" (20.3 cm) on all four sides of the discharge louvers. In this

type of installation, the discharge louvers must be field-supported.

To install the discharge louvers on an interior wall, drill holes every 8" (20.3 cm) in the flanges on all four

sides of the discharge louvers to accommodate lag bolts (supplied by others). See Page 71, Table 31 for

recommended quantity of lag bolts to be installed. In this type of installation, the discharge louvers are self-

supporting; no other support is needed in a standard installation.


FIGURE 61: Double Deflection Discharge Louvers

B

A

C

Model A B C Weight

TT112 - TT118

in cm

19.5

49.5

26.0

66.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

70

31.8

TT212in

cm

19.5

49.5

50.0

127.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

70

31.8

TT215in

cm

19.5

49.5

50.0

127.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

95

43.1

TT218in

cm

26.0

66.0

58.0

147.3

24.0

61.0

lb kg

130

59.0

TT221in

cm

33.0

83.8

76.0

193.0

24.0

61.0

lb kg

260

118.0

TT224in

cm

35.0

88.9

90.0

228.6

24.0

61.0

lb kg

375

170.1

TT230in

cm

40.0

101.6

115.0

292.1

24.0

61.0

lb kg

400

181.4

TT233 & TT236

in cm

43.0

109.2

133.0

337.8

24.0

61.0

lb kg

500

226.8

SECTION 17: DUCT CONSIDERATIONS

75 of 198

SECTION 17: DUCT CONSIDERATIONS

The air handler has been designed to operate at the

specific air volume and external static pressure that

was ordered. This static pressure is generated by any

additional components that are added to the heater

(i.e. inlet hood, filter section, dampers, ductwork,

discharge heads, etc). Additional static pressure

beyond that ordered will affect the performance of the

air handler and lessen the air volume that can be

delivered. See Page 75, Table 32 for static pressure

drop of air handler components.

Table 32: Internal Static Pressures (ISP)

Proper engineering methods need to be employed

when calculating duct and component static pressure

(i.e. 2009 ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals,

Chapter 21).

The system ductwork must comply with Sheet Metal

and Air Conditioning Contractors Nationals

Association (SMACNA) or any other recognized

standards.

As a general rule, all discharge ducts should have a

straight run of at least 3 hydraulic duct diameters

after the air handler before adding any fittings,

elbows, restrictions, etc. Return ducts should have

the same straight run before attaching to the unit.

Hydraulic duct diameter for round ducts (in inches):

Dh = d

Dh: hydraulic diameter

d: round duct inside diameter

Hydraulic duct diameter for rectangular ducts:

Dh = (2*H*W)/(H+W)

Dh: hydraulic diameter

H: rectangular duct height

W: rectangular duct width

The air handler is not designed to support the weight

of ductwork. Ductwork must be constructed in a

fashion that is self-supporting. Ductwork should be

straight, elbows should be minimal and any

transitions should be smooth. Ductwork fittings (i.e.

elbows, transitions, etc.) should be located a

minimum of 4' (1.2 m) from the connection. Refer to

SMACNA guidelines for further information.

Depending on the options ordered with the air

handler, flanges (either external or internal) may be

provided to facilitate connection of ductwork. In

cases where flanges are not provided, flat surfaces

on the exterior skin of the air handler are provided to

facilitate connection of ductwork.

Neither the flanges nor exterior skin of the air handler

are capable of supporting the load of the ductwork.

Ductwork support must come from the structure itself

that the air handler is servicing. On horizontal runs, it

is recommended that ductwork be supported every 6'

(1.8 m) for ductwork that has a cross section of 10 ft2

(0.9 m2) or less and every 4' (1.2 m) for ductwork

which has a cross section of greater than 10 ft2 (0.9

m2). On vertical runs, it is recommended that

ductwork be supported every 10' (3.0 m). On both

cases, supporting members should be sized to carry

the weight load.

Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.

Falling Hazard


WARNING


A. Blower D. Inlet HoodB. V-Bank or Flat Offset Filters E. Inlet DamperC. Discharge Damper

NOTE: Burner has constant ISP = .40” w.c.

STAT

IC P

RESS

URE

(in w

c)

PERCENT OF CFM RANGE


76 of 198

17.1 Inlet Air Duct

Inlet duct work height and width must be no smaller

than the air handler inlet height and width and supply

only uncontaminated air to the air handler. See Page 12, Figure 11 through Page 23, Figure 22 for inlet

dimensions.

17.2 Return Air Duct

Return air duct work height and width must be no

smaller than the air handler return air opening height

and width. See Page 12, Figure 11 through Page 23, Figure 22 for return air dimensions.

17.3 Discharge Duct Work

Discharge duct work sizes should be determined by

the application requirements of the system. Units

with twin blowers must have a common discharge

duct.

Table 33: Minimum Discharge Duct Connection Size

Model Height Width

TT112 - TT118(in)

(cm)19.5

49.5

26

66.0

TT212 & TT215(in)

(cm)19.5

49.5

50

127.0

TT218(in)

(cm)26

66.0

58

147.3

TT221(in)

(cm)33

83.8

76

193.0

TT224(in)

(cm)35

88.9

90

228.6

TT230(in)

(cm)40

101.6

115

292.1

TT233 & TT236(in)

(cm)43

104.2

133

337.8

SECTION 18: GAS PIPING

77 of 198

SECTION 18: GAS PIPING18.1 Gas Manifolds

All gas piping to the air handler must comply with:

United States: Refer to NFPA 54/ANSI Z223.1 - latest

revision, National Fuel Gas Code.



The air handlers are available with three different

types of gas manifolds:

• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

compliant manifold: (See Page 78, Figure 62

through Page 79, Figure 63.)

• Factory Mutual (FM)-compliant manifold: (See Page 79, Figure 64 through Page 80, Figure 65.)

• XL Insurance (former IRI)-compliant manifold: (8

through Page 81, Figure 68.)

18.2 Gas Piping and Pressures

The air handler is equipped with a gas manifold

suitable for connection to supply pressure of up to:

• 28 in wc or 1 psi. maximum for the less than 1

million BTU capacity gas train. See Page 78, Figure 62.

• 5 psi maximum for 1 million BTU and over

capacity gas trains. See Page 79, Figure 63

through Page 81, Figure 68.

When gas supply exceeds the above-listed maximum

gas pressures, an additional high pressure gas

regulator will be required to assure that the correct

gas pressure is supplied to the gas train. Pressure

should be measured between the high pressure gas

regulator and safety shut off valve. Minimum gas

pressure as indicated on data plate must be mea-

sured with the burner operating in high fire.

Table 34: Gas Train Capacities

MBH Manifold Size Inlet Gas Pressure

Minimum Maximum Up to 999 1"

7" wc1 PSI

1000 - 16501.25"

5 PSI

1" 12" wc

1651 - 24991.5" 7" wc

1.25" 12" wc

2500 - 30002" 7" wc

1.5" 12" wc

3001 - 40002.5" 8" wc

2" 12" wc

4001 - 5000

3" 8" wc

2.5" 12" wc

2" 21" wc

5001 - 60003" 12" wc

2.5" 21" wc

6001 - 8000 3" 12" wc

8001 - 9000 3" 21" wc


78 of 198

18.3 Gas Manifold Venting

Vent valves fitted on XL-compliant manifolds on

indoor installed air handlers must be piped to the

atmosphere outside the structure. This is the

responsibility of the installer.

18.3.1 Vent Line Installation

The following may be used as a guideline for

installation, but all applicable codes and regulations

must be followed.

• Natural gas and LPG are toxic and flammable

substances. They must be released where they

will not cause personal injury or property damage.

The end of the vent line must be located where it

is safe to release gas.

• Pipe the vent line outside the structure.

• Use as short a vertical run of pipe as possible.

• Do not run pipe from a high point to a lower point

to avoid obstacles.

• Use a minimum number of bends.

• Do not downsize the pipe from the origination

point (must be same size or larger).

• Make sure vent line is free from obstructions.

• Do not group vent lines together into a common

header.

• The outside termination must have a

weatherproof cap or be directed downward for

protection from the elements and must be

screened to prevent the entry of any objects.

FIGURE 62: ANSI less than 1000 MBH, FM Less 700 MBH Manifold

PILOT GAS REGULATORCONTROLS THE AMOUNT OFGAS FLOW TO THE BURNER'S PILOT TUBE.

BLOCK GAS SOLENOID VALVE.SECONDARY BACK-UP VALVE TOPREVENT GAS FROM REACHINGBURNER DURING SHUTDOWN.

MAIN GAS PRESSURE REGULATORCONTROL THE FLOW OF GAS TO

THE MAIN BURNER & TO SETTHE HIGH FIRE ON THE BURNER

PILOT SHUT-OFF COCKMANUAL SHUT OFF THAT ISOLATES

THE PILOT GAS ASSEMBLY FROM THE MAIN GAS SUPPLY.

MAIN GAS SOLENOID VALVE.OPENS & CLOSES ALLOWING

GAS TO FLOW TO THE BURNER.

PILOT SOLENOID VALVE.ALLOWS GAS TO FLOW TOTHE BURNER PILOT.

METERING VALVE.CONTROLS THE FLOW OFGAS TO THE MAIN BURNER& TO SET THE LOW FIREON THE BURNER.

HIGH GAS PRESS. SWITCHPROTECTS AGAINST EXCESSIVE GASPRESSURE


79 of 198

FIGURE 63: ANSI Manifold 1000 - 5000 MBH - 1"-2" NPT

FIGURE 64: ANSI Manifold Above 3000 MBH - 2 ½" to 3" NPT


MAIN GAS SOLENOID VALVE.OPENS & CLOSES ALLOWING





BLOCK GAS SOLENOID VALVE.SECONDARY BACK-UP VALVE TOPREVENT GAS FROM REACHINGBURNER DURING SHUTDOWN.

METERING VALVE.CONTROLS THE FLOW OFGAS TO THE MAIN BURNER& TO SET THE HIGH & LOW FIRE ON THE BURNER.


MAXIT

ROL

Selectra

Honeywell

FLUID POWER GAS VALVE

FLUID POWER GAS VALVEHoneywell

MAXIT

ROL

Selectra




BLOCK GAS MOTORIZED ACTUATORSECONDARY BACK-UP.OPENS AND CLOSES VALVE.

MAIN GAS MOTORIZED ACTUATOR.OPENS & CLOSES VALVE ALLOWINGGAS TO FLOW TO THE BURNER.

MOTORIZED BLOCKVALVE BODY.

SECONDARY BACK-UPVALVE TO PREVENT GAS

FROM REACHING THEBURNER DURING

SHUTDOWN.

PILOT SHUT-OFF COCKMANUAL SHUT OFF THAT ISOLATES THE PILOT GAS ASSEMBLY FROM THE MAIN GAS SUPPLY.

MAIN GAS VALVE BODYOPENS & CLOSES ALLOWING


SHUT-OFF COCK.MANUAL SHUT OFF THAT ISOLATES THE GAS TRAIN ASSEMBLY FROM THE BURNER.



80 of 198

FIGURE 65: FM Manifold 700 MBH Less than 1000 MBH 1" NPT

FIGURE 66: FM Manifold 1000 - 5000 MBH - 1"-2" NPT


POSITION INDICATING BLOCKGAS SOLENOID VALVE.SECONDARY BACK-UP VALVE TOPREVENT GAS FROM REACHINGBURNER DURING SHUTDOWN.





POSITION INDICATING MAINGAS SOLENOID VALVE.

OPENS & CLOSES ALLOWINGGAS TO FLOW TO THE BURNER.




Honeywell


POSITION INDICATINGMAIN GAS SOLENOID VALVE.







LOW GAS PRESS. SWITCHPROTECTS AGAINST

INSUFFICIENT GAS PRESSURE.


Selectra

MAXIT

ROLNOTE: Not used below 2500 MBH


81 of 198

FIGURE 67: FM Manifold above 3000 MBH 2 ½" to 3" NPT

FIGURE 68: XL Manifold Less than 1000 MBH - 1" NPT

Honeywell



MAXIT

ROL

Selectra









SHUTDOWN.














POSITION INDICATING MAINGAS SOLENOID VALVE.








82 of 198

FIGURE 69: XL Manifold 1000 - 5000 MBH 1" - 2" NPT


POSITION INDICATINGMAIN GAS SOLENOID VALVE.










VENT VALVE.

VENTS GAS THAT IS TRAPPEDIN THE MANIFOLD BETWEEN

THE MAIN & BLOCK VALVES, ONSHUTDOWN, TO THE OUTDOORS.

Selectra

MAXIT

ROL


83 of 198

FIGURE 70: XL Manifold above 3000 MBH 2 ½" - 3" NPT

18.4 Gas Piping

The gas manifold extends through the side of the

control cabinet. The factory piping terminates with a

female pipe connection. The manual main gas

shutoff valve is shipped loose for field installation. Be

sure that the fuel supply pipe connected at this point

is large enough to ensure the proper gas flow and

line pressure at the inlet of the air handler.

The piping must comply with:

United States: Refer to NFPA 54/ANSI Z223.1 - latest

revision, National Fuel Gas Code.



Gas supply piping must conform to best building

practices and local codes. During installation of the

gas piping, be sure that no piping restricts

accessibility to the air handler or its removable

access panels and/or access doors. Lockable

manual shut-off valve must be added by the installer

in compliance with Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA) regulations.

18.5 Pressure Test Ports

There are 3/8"(9.5 mm) and 1/8"(3.2 mm) pressure

test ports located on the air handler equipment. The

test ports are available to measure the manifold inlet

gas pressure and the burner gas pressure during

burner setup.

18.5.1 Manifold Inlet Gas Pressure 3/8" NPT

The pressure test port for measuring manifold inlet

pressure is located on the pilot tee which is located

on the manifold inlet tee. Refer to the unit rating plate

for the acceptable inlet gas pressure. See Page 84, Figure 71.

Honeywell



MAXIT

ROL

Selectra









SHUTDOWN.





VENT VALVE.VENTS GAS THAT

IS TRAPPED IN THEMANIFOLD BETWEENTHE MAIN & BLOCK

VALVES, ON SHUTDOWN,TO THE OUTDOORS.

LOW GAS PRESS. SWITCHPROTECTS AGAINSTINSUFFICIENT GAS

PRESSURE.



84 of 198

FIGURE 71: Gas Pressure Taps (Manifold)

18.5.2 Burner Gas Pressure - 1/8" NPT

A pressure tap is used to measure negative airflow at

the burner and to set high fire gas pressure. The

pressure tap is located on an elbow between the

modulating valve and the burner. See Page 84, Figure 72.

FIGURE 72: Burner Gas Pressure Tap

18.6 Line Pressure Test - Leak Testing

The air handler and its individual shut-off valve must

be disconnected from the gas supply piping systems

during any pressure testing of that system at test

pressures in excess of 28 in wc (69.7 mbar). The air

handler must be isolated from the gas supply piping

system by closing its individual manual gas valve

(shipped loose for field installation) that is to be

located immediately upstream of the pilot tee.

SECTION 19: ELECTRICAL

85 of 198

SECTION 19: ELECTRICAL

Each air handler is equipped with a wiring diagram

which will vary depending on the type of controls and

options supplied.

NOTE: Spark testing or shorting of the control wires

by any means will render the transformers

inoperative.

19.1 Wiring and Electrical Connections

All electrical wiring and connections, including

electrical grounding, must comply with;

United States: Refer to National Electrical Code®,

NFPA 70 - latest revision. Wiring must conform to the

most current National Electrical Code®, local

ordinances, and any special diagrams furnished.

Canada: Refer to Canadian Electrical Code, CSA

C22.1 Part 1 - latest revision.

Check rating plate on air handler for supply voltage

and current requirements.

If any of the original control wire supplied with the air

handler must be replaced, replace it with type THHN

221 °F (105 °C), 600 V, 16 gauge wire or equivalent.

For all other wires, replace with the equivalent size

and type of wire that was originally provided with the

air handler.

19.2 Remote Panel

The remote panel must be wired as shown on the

electrical schematic.

All power supply and motor wiring must be type

THWN - or equivalent, minimum with a 167 °F

(75 °C) temperature rise. For wire gauge sizes, See Page 85, Table 35.

19.2.1 Remote Panel Mounting Distance

If the inter connection wiring between the remote

panel and the air handler control enclosure is run in a

single conduit, the wire run can be as long as 100'

(30 m). If the interconnection wiring between remote

panel and the air handler control enclosure is run in

two conduits (separating the shielded cable and the

120v power supply for the remote panel), the wire run

can be as long as 200' (60 m) For longer wire runs,

consult the factory. Care should be used to avoid

running the interconnect wiring near large industrial

loads or high voltage wire runs as that may further

limit the length of the interconnect wire run.

Table 35: Control Voltage Wiring For All Control Systems

NOTE: Wiring for temperature controls must be run in

shielded cable as indicated on the wiring diagram.

19.2.2 Low Voltage Control Wiring

Low voltage (24V - AC/DC) control wiring in excess of

100' (30.5 m) in length should be in its own separate

conduit run to prevent interference.

19.3 Motor Current Draw

For current requirements of the motor, see rating

plate located on the blower motor. Current draw may

be adjusted downard by reducing blower rotations

per minute (RPM) or by increasing external static

pressure.

19.4 Control Current Draw

The maximum current draw for an air handler’s

controls and accessories is 4.5 A.

DANGER

Electrical Shock Hazard

Disconnect electric before service.

More than one disconnect switch may be required to disconnect electric from equipment.

Equipment must be properly grounded.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or electrical shock.

VOLTS WIRE GAUGE WIRE FEET120 18 150 (45 m)

120 16 250 (75 m)

120 14 350 (106 m)


86 of 198

19.5 Safety Systems

Safety systems are required for proper performance

of the air handler. The air handler shall not be

permitted to operate with any safety system disabled.

If a fault is found in any of the safety systems, then

the system shall be repaired only by a contractor

qualified in the installation and service of gas fired

heating equipment, using only components that are

sold and supplied by Weather-Rite LLC. See Page 86, Figure 36 for a brief description of each safety

device, its location and its switching voltage.

Table 36: Safety Systems

19.5.1 Manual Reset High Temperature Limit Switch

If for any reason, the temperature of the air at the

discharge of the blower reaches the limit set point of

160 °F (71.1 °C), the high temperature limit switch will

open the circuit to the burner system and discontinue

all burner functions. Events that could result in

excessive discharge air temperatures includes

defective burner modulation system or a surge in gas

pressure reaching the burner. Restarting the burner

can only be accomplished after the limit has cooled

down and the reset button on the switch has been

depressed. This switch is located in the air handler

control enclosure.

19.5.2 Airflow Pressure Switches

The low airflow velocity pressure switch monitors the

airflow (differential pressure) across the burner.

When the airflow across the burner reaches the

proper velocity (volume) for combustion, the switch

closes. When the switch closes, it permits the flame

safeguard relay to begin ignition. This switch is

factory set at 0.2 in w.c. The high velocity pressure

switch will open if the airflow across the burner

exceeds its maximum allowable limit. When the

switch opens, it shuts down the flame safeguard

relay. This switch is factory set at 1.0" wc The

pressure switch is a safety device, which can be field-

adjusted.

19.5.3 Gas Pressure Switches

The high gas pressure switch is standard on all

models. The low gas pressure switch is standard on

certain models. (ANSI and FM compliant gas trains

above 2,500 MBH and XL compliant gas trains above

400 MBH) and are also available as an option on the

others.

The function of the gas pressure switches is to

protect against either a lack of gas or an excessive

pressure in the system.

On the low gas pressure switch side, this switch

opens its internal switch which shuts the burner down

and prevents its operation due to insufficient gas

pressure.

On the high gas pressure side, its internal switch will

open, shutting down the burner due to excessive gas

pressure passing through the gas train.

The settings of the gas pressure switches are field

adjustable. The one monitoring the incoming gas

pressure is the low gas pressure switch. The low gas

pressure switch must be set to 2" wc to

accommodate the surge drop when the valves of the

gas train open.

The high gas pressure switch must be set to 8" wc to

accommodate the surge increase when the gas train

valve opens.

If either switch senses a pressure which is lower (low

gas pressure switch) or higher (high gas pressure

switch) than its set point, then the switch will open

and lock out, shutting the burner down. The switch

will have to be reset manually, once the condition has

been corrected.

19.5.4 Flame Control

This device will check for both pilot flame and main

flame within the burner. When a flame signal from the

pilot flame is available, it will allow the main gas valve

to open. If a pilot flame is not present, the electrical

signal cannot be sent and the pilot gas valve will

close. The relay is equipped with a trial for ignition. If

ignition does not occur, the flame safeguard relay will

try to relight or lockout (depending on model used),

and must be manually reset. (See Troubleshooting

Guide - Page 156, Section 27).

Safety Controls Location Voltage

Manual Reset High-Temp

Limit (All Models)

Air Handler

Control

Enclosure

120V

Pressure Switches (All

Models)

Air Handler

Control

Enclosure

120V

Flame Control (All Models) 120V

SECTION 20: SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

87 of 198

SECTION 20: SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 20.1 Air Handler Configuration

Based on the air handler application, the air handler

may be configured in any of the following styles to

achieve the described functionality. These

configurations are available on all air handlers. For a

comparison of these configurations, see Page 87, Table 37 on Page 89, Figure 74. For Volumatic

Recirculating style air handlers, a carbon dioxide

sensor must be installed limiting the building carbon

dioxide concentration to 5000 ppm. This sensor is

field supplied.

Table 37: Configuration Chart

DANGER






WARNING

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Do not recirculate air from the heated space over burner.

Air supply to burner must be from outside.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or injury.

Heater Configuration

Air FlowAir

VolumeControl

Make Up Air

(MUA)100% Outside Air Constant -

Volumatic

Recirculating

Adjustable ratio of 20%

outside air and 80%

return air to 100%

outside air and 0%

return air.

Constant

Manual or Auto

building pressure

control of outside /

return air ratio

Volumatic w/

VFD100% Outside Air

Variable

20%-100%

Manual or Auto

building pressure

control of air vol-

ume


88 of 198

20.1.1 Make-Up Air (MUA) Style

The MUA style air handler has a constant speed

blower that is designed to deliver a constant volume

of air to the heated space. This style air handler

supplies 100% outside air to the heated space and is

not capable of supplying return air.

20.1.2 Volumatic Recirculating

The VR style air handler has a constant speed

blower that is designed to deliver a constant volume

of air to the heated space. The standard control is

manual, with options available to allow for a building

pressure sensor is used to detect and control the

differential pressure between the outside and the

heated space. The total volume of air delivered by

the air handler may at times consist of 0% to 80%

return air.

20.1.3 Volumatic with VFD

The Volumatic with VFD style air handler uses

modulating discharge dampers to control outside air

delivered to the space (this style air handler does not

return any air from the building). Proper air velocity /

pressure drop over the burner is maintained by

automatic modulating profile dampers. This style is

available in two versions - Two Position Volumatic

and Full Volumatic. The Two Position Volumatic

delivers 100% of the outside air and to a pre-selected

second value of airflow (operator determined) down

to 25% of the full CFM rating of the air handler. Full

Volumatic allows full control of air flow from 100%

down to 25% of the full CFM rating of the air handler

or any where in between.

20.1.4 Autocycle Air Control

The Autocycle Air Control adjusts the positioning of

the discharge damper to control the volume of air

discharged into the facility. The Autocycle includes

up to 12 pre-set positions adjusted by potentiometers

mounted on the printed circuit board.

Each pre-set position is controlled by an exhaust

fan interlock requiring two wires per interlock. The

installer must connect the two wires between the

printed circuit board on the make-up air unit and the

auxiliary contacts of the exhaust fans. the exhaust

fan starters must include auxiliary contacts.

FIGURE 73: Air Handler Configurations

20.2 Remote Panel Options

The remote panel should be mounted in the

conditioned space in a convenient location for

controlling the air handler. Do not locate a remote

panel which contains temperature sensing controls in

an area that is directly affected by this air handler or

another heat source as it may interfere with the

operation of the air handler.

20.2.1 8.3LS Remote Panel Discharge Air Tem-perature Control (DAT)

The 8.3LS Remote Panel includes Summer/Off/

Winter switch and blower, burner, and flame failure

indicators in a NEMA 1 style enclosure and

discharge temperature set point.

Blower Indicator: Indicates the air handler is

supplying power to the main fan motor via the motor

controls.

Burner Indicator: Indicates that the air handler has

supplied power to open the main fuel shut off valve.

Discharge Air

100%Outside Air

25%-100%Volume Motorized

ProfileDamper

Discharge Air

100%Outside Air

Variable0%-80%

Return Air

MotorizedProfile

Damper

Variable20%-100%Outside Air

Discharge Air

Volumatic with VFD

Make-Up Air (MUA)

Volumatic Recirculating


89 of 198

Flame Failure Indicator: The burner control module

has experienced a fault and will need to be reset. The

burner control module must be reset at the air

handler. Refer to the Maintenance and Trouble

Shooting sections of this manual to determine the

cause of the fault.

Summer/Off/Winter Switch:

Summer position: The blower will operate without the

burner for summer ventilation.

Winter position: The blower and burner will operate

as needed to maintain airflow and temperature.

FIGURE 74: 8.3LS Remote Panel DAT

20.2.2 8.3 Remote Panel Discharge Air Tempera-ture Control with Room Over-Ride (DATRO)



indicators in a NEMA 1 style enclosure and

discharge temperature set point with a space sensing

thermostat which provides space temperature control

by raising the discharge air temperature to a pre-

selected point.



controls.








cause of the fault.





as needed for the application to maintain airflow and

temperature.

FIGURE 75: 8.3 Remote Panel DATRO

20.2.3 8.3LS Remote Panel Room Temperature Control (RMTC)



indicators in a NEMA 1 style enclosure and space

temperature control.



controls.








cause of the fault.





as needed to maintain airflow and temperature.


90 of 198

FIGURE 76: 8.3LS Remote Panel RMTC

20.2.4 DDC - Ready Option

The DDC-ready option provides inputs to receive

control signals from a customer determined control

system and outputs to provide sequence status to the

same. A 24VAC transformer is provided by Weather-

Rite's control panel for use by the customer's DDC

system to command "Unit Start" and "Heat Start"

signals (by means of DDC dry contact) back to the

air handler control panel.

The air handler provides 24VAC signals to the

customer's DDC for monitoring the following status:

Unit Running

Heat Running (Gas Valves "On")

Flame Failure

On all air handlers, the burner modulation will be

controlled 0-10VDC or 4-20MA signal from the

customer's DDC. Temperature monitoring and

modulation valve adjustment are completed by the

customer supplied control system. For volumatic

recirculating and volumatic w/VFD style air handlers,

the control system can also control the modulating

dampers.

20.3 Basic Sequence of Operation

The following is an overview of the sequence of

operation. Depending on the application and options

supplied with the air handler, this can vary greatly.

Thoroughly review all documentation for the air

handler, including the electrical print, to familiarize

and understand the actual sequence of operation.

Summer (Blower Only)

With power supplied to the air handler and the

Summer/Off/Winter switch on the remote panel in the

SUMMER position, power is supplied to the blower

motor starter coil, allowing the blower motor to start.

The burner circuit is NOT energized.

Winter (Blower & Burner)

With power supplied to the air handler and the

Summer/Off/Winter switch on the remote panel in the

WINTER position, power is supplied to the blower

motor starter coil, allowing the blower motor to start.

Auxiliary contacts on the blower starter close,

powering the flame relay through the high limit, and

low- and high-gas pressure switches (if provided).

When airflow is proven by the burner airflow

switches, the burner firing circuit is powered up. After

the pilot flame or main flame is proven by the flame

detector, the main and blocking valves are opened

and the ignition transformer is de-energized. The

temperature control system is powered separately

and controls the flow of the fuel to maintain space /

discharge set point temperature through the

temperature control amplifier which controls the

modulating valve.

20.4 Flame Control

The main function of a flame safeguard device is to

prevent the flow of fuel into the burner in the event of

either a flame failure during a running cycle or an

ignition failure during an attempt to fire. The

secondary function of a flame safeguard is to cycle

the entire burner system. Flame safeguards are used

with rectification type flame detectors, which provide

a small pulsating direct current when a suitable flame

is present. The current is amplified and used in the

electronic network of the flame safeguard. If the

flame rod signal is insufficient to hold in the electronic

network, the flame safeguard device quickly and

safely shuts down the burner system. It also triggers

the LED for alarm and the remote alarm light.

Three types of flame safeguard devices are used on

this equipment. They are the Fireye® MicroM, Fireye®

M4RT1 and the Honeywell® RM7897. The Fireye®

MicroM and the Honeywell® RM7897 are versatile in

that it can be coupled to a UV Scanner detector or a

flame rod style detector. Its construction is modular,

so that by changing amplifiers and programmers its

function is varied. The Fireye® M4RT1 is similar, but

only accepts flame rod detectors and its functions are

controlled by the removal or installation of jumpers.

All three flame safeguards can be used in all agency


91 of 198

compliance requirements (ANSI, CSA, FM and XL).

20.4.1 Fireye® MicroM Flame Safeguard

This control is located in the center of the main

control panel.

FIGURE 77: Fireye Components MicroM Family

The cover of this control is red and it has a reset

button extending out from it. It consists of three

components, which are:

1. The MEC120 chassis contains the main hard-

ware. It also contains a fuse to protect itself

from external shorts or overloads.

FIGURE 78: Fireye Chassis MEC120

2. The MEP100 and MEP 230-programmer mod-

ule determines the operational characteristics

of the control. It also has mounted on its exte-

rior, five (5) lights which indicate the operating

status of the control.

3. The MERT4 (flame rod) rectifier/amplifier mod-

ule provides the flame scanning capability and

the flame failure response time. On its exterior

are test jacks, which permit flame signal mea-

surement during operation.

FIGURE 79: Fireye Rectifier/Amplifier MERT4

The functions of the indicator lights, which are

located on the programmer module, are as follows.

They are listed in the order you will find them on the

flame safeguard. This is also the order in which they

will occur in the sequence. The indicators are

actually a red colored light emitting diode or LED, this

is how they will be referred to from now on.

1. Operating Control - This indicator is on when

power is present at terminals #1 and #7 of the

flame safeguard.

2. Air Flow - This indicator comes on at the same

time as the one above. This is because the

actual circuit is not used and is jumped out. It

can be used as a troubleshooting guide, that

power is present to terminals #6 and #8 in the

flame safeguard.

3. PTFI - This acronym stands for Pilot Trial For

Ignition. This indicator is on only during the trial

for ignition period. It indicates that terminal #3

(pilot valve) and terminal #4 (ignition module),

in the flame safeguard, have been turned on.


92 of 198

4. Flame On - This indicator comes on after the

flame safeguard has proven out the flame sig-

nal. It also shows that the main valves have

been activated in the equipment. On the safe-

guard control, terminal #5 is powered up.

5. Alarm - This indicates that a safety lockout has

occurred, whether by loss of flame signal or

failure to ignite.

FIGURE 80: Fireye LED Display MicroM

20.4.1.1 Fireye® MicroM Flame Safeguard Opera-tion (ANSI, FM < 2.5MBH and XL < 1MBH)

The following will describe the internal operation of

the flame safeguard control (that is equipped with a

MEP100 programmer & MERT4 amplifier) and the

external functions that will take place. We will just

trace the electromechanical steps and not the

electronic network.

• All interlocks, control relays and safety limits are

closed. Power is supplied to terminals #1 and #7

of the flame safeguard.

• The Operating Control LED illuminates.

• The electronic network is now powered up which

illuminates the Air Flow LED.

NOTE: The airflow circuit of the safeguard control is

not used and is jumped. This is why the Air Flow LED

illuminates with the Operating Control LED.

• Following a short time delay period (purge cycle)

of 2 to 5 seconds. The electronic network closes a

contact that powers up terminal #3 and terminal

#4 in the safeguard control.

• Terminal #3 powers up the equipment's pilot gas

solenoid valve which opens allowing gas to flow.

• Terminal #4 powers up the ignition module

creating the spark at the burner.

• This lasts for 10 seconds. This cycle is called trial

for ignition. During this time period, the PTFI LED

is illuminated.

• When the flame sensor detects a pilot flame, the

signal is sent back to the safeguard control. The

electronic network illuminates the FLAME LED.

• It closes a contact, which powers up terminal #5

in the control. This terminal powers up the main

gas valves allowing the main burner to come on.

• At the same time the electronic network opens a

contact which removes power from terminal #4.

This shuts off the power to the ignition module,

which stops the spark at the burner. The

safeguard control at this point monitors the flame.

NOTE: If a pilot flame is not detected during the 10

second trial for ignition, the pilot gas solenoid valve

and the ignition module are turned off. A safety

lockout occurs which shuts down the electronic

network. The only LED that will be illuminated at this

time will be the OPERATING CONTROL. 30 seconds

after the lockout occurs, the alarm circuit is powered

up, illuminating the ALARM LED. Manual reset is

now required. Wait 10 seconds before resetting the

control to allow the lockout switch to cool down.

NOTE: If the flame signal is lost while the burner is

on, the ignition module will be turned back on. A 10-

second re-light trial for ignition is started. The PTFI

LED will illuminate during this time.If a flame signal is

detected, the main gas valves will turn back on and

the ignition module will turn off. If a flame is not

detected during this re-light trial, the pilot gas

solenoid valve and ignition module will shut off. A

safety lockout occurs which shuts down the

electronic network. The only LED that will be

illuminated at this time will be the OPERATING

CONTROL. Thirty seconds after the alarm lockout

happens the alarm circuit is powered up, illuminating

the ALARM LED. Manual reset is now required. Wait

10 seconds before resetting the control to allow the

lockout switch to cool down.

20.4.1.2 Fireye® MicroM Flame Safeguard (FM ≥ 2.5MBH and XL ≥ 1MBH)

If the equipment is ordered with a FM compliant

Manifold equal or over 2.5 M BTU or XL compliant

equal to or over 1 M BTU, certain sequences must be


93 of 198

provided in the flame safeguard control. There is a

specified time for pre-purge, trial for ignition, and non

recycle.

FIGURE 81: Fireye MEP 230 Programmer

1. Timed pre-purgeThis must be a separate purge from the rest of

the system. The trial for ignition must be

delayed by 7 seconds while the blower in the

unit is running. This is to guarantee that there

are no combustible gases or vapors present in

the air stream during burner ignition and light

off.

2. Trial for ignitionThe length of time must be fixed at 10 seconds.

This is to prevent the ignition module from con-

tinuing activating the spark electrode if a haz-

ardous malfunction takes place.

3. Non recycleThis feature prevents the flame safeguard con-

trol from trying to re-light the burner if it should

fail during the ignition cycle or firing cycle.

Instead it goes directly to a lockout condition

and the flame safeguard will need to be manu-

ally reset.

To accomplish these requirements the MEP100

programmer is replaced with a MEP230 programmer.

This programmer has the same LED displays as the

MEP100, same fuse for protection, but on its face it

has eight dipswitches (digital input programming

switch). These switches must first be set before the

control is installed.

NOTE: The dipswitch settings become permanently

stored within the programmer's eeprom memory after

8 hours of continuous electrical operation.

To set the dipswitches for their appropriate setting

use the following procedure.

NOTE: READ OVER THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS

COMPLETELY BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO SET

THE DIPSWITCHES OR MOVING THE CLEAR

PLASTIC WINDOW.

PURGE TIMING• Locate dipswitches #1 through #5.

• Switch #2 is the one for 7 seconds timing. Move

this switch to the right, which is the ON position.

• The remaining switches (#1 & #3 through #5)

must remain to the left in the OFF position.

Purge Timing is now set, if all five switches are left in

the off position, the control will lockout right after

power is supplied to the flame safeguard control.

TRIAL FOR IGNITION• Locate dipswitches #6 and #7.

• Switch #6 must remain to the left in the OFF

position.

• Switch #7 is the one for 10 seconds timing. Move

this switch to the right, which is the ON position.

Trial for Ignition timing is now set, if both switches are

left in the off position the control will automatically

supply a timing of less than 5 seconds

(approximately 3 to 4 seconds). If both switches are

in the on position the control will go directly to lockout

once prepurge is completed.

RECYCLE/NON RECYCLE OPERATION

• Locate dipswitch #8.

• Move this switch to the right, which is the ON

position.

The non recycle feature is now set, if the switch is left

in the off position the safeguard control will try for a

relight if the burner should fail during a firing cycle.

20.4.1.3 Fireye® MicroM Flame Safeguard Opera-tion (FM ≥ 2.5MBH and XL ≥ 1MBH)

The following will describe the internal operation of a

flame safeguard control (that is equipped with a

MP230 programmer) and the external functions that

will take place. We will just trace the

electromechanical steps and not the electronic


94 of 198

network.


closed. Power is supplied to terminals #1 and #7

of the flame safeguard.







• Following a time delay period (purge cycle) 7

seconds. The electronic network closes a contact

that powers up terminal #3 and terminal #4 in the

safeguard control.







is illuminated.




• It closes an internal contact, which powers up

terminal #5 in the control. This terminal powers up

the main gas valves allowing the main burner to

come on.

• At the same time that the contact in step b closes,

the electronic network opens a contact, which

powers terminal #4. This shuts off the power to

the ignition module, which stops the spark at the

burner. The safeguard control at this point

monitors the flame.







after the lockout has activated, the alarm circuit is

powered up, illuminating the ALARM LED. Manual

reset is now required. Wait 10 seconds before

resetting the control to allow the lockout switch to

cool down.


on, the pilot and main gas valves will be turned off. A




CONTROL. Thirty seconds after the lockout has

activated, the alarm circuit is powered up,

illuminating the ALARM LED. Manual reset is now

required. Wait 10 seconds before resetting the control

to allow the lockout switch to cool down.

20.4.2 Fireye® M4RT1 Flame Safeguard

This control is located in the center of the main

control panel. To reset this flame relay, power to it must be shut off and turned back on.

FIGURE 82: Fireye M4RT1

This is an exposed circuit board one piece control. It

contains a fuse to protect itself from external shorts

or overloads and on its exterior it has five lights which

indicate the operating status of the control.


located on the programmer module, are as follows.

They are listed in the order you will find them on the

flame safeguard and is also the order in which they

will occur in the sequence. The indicators are

actually a red colored light emitting diode or LED, this

is how they will be referred to from now on.

1. Operating Control - This indicator is on when

power is present at terminals #1 and #7 of the

flame safeguard.

2. Air Flow - This indicator comes on at the same

time as the one above. This is because the

actual circuit is not used and is jumped out. It

can be used as a troubleshooting guide, that

power is present to terminals #6 and #8 in the

flame safeguard.


95 of 198

3. PTFI - This acronym stands for Pilot Trial For

Ignition. This indicator is on only during the trial

for ignition period. It indicates that terminal #3

(pilot valve) and terminal #4 (ignition module),

in the flame safeguard, have been turned on.

4. Flame On - This indicator comes on after the

flame safeguard has proven out the flame sig-

nal. It also shows that the main valves have

been activated in the equipment. On the safe-

guard control, terminal #5 is powered up.

5. Alarm - This indicates that a safety lockout has


failure to ignite.

20.4.2.1 Fireye® M4RT1 Flame Safeguard Opera-tion (ANSI, FM < 2.5MBH and XL < 1MBH)


flame safeguard and the external functions that will

take place. We will just trace the electromechanical

steps and not the electronic network.


closed. Power is supplied to terminal #7 of the

flame safeguard.







• Following a short time delay period (purge cycle)

determined by the jumpers, See Page 96, Figure 83 and Page 96, Table 38. The electronic network

closes a contact that powers up terminal #3 and

terminal #4 in the safeguard control.







is illuminated.




• It closes a contact, which powers up terminal #5

in the control. This terminal powers up the main

gas valves allowing the main burner to come on.

• At the same time the electronic network opens a

contact which removes power from terminal #4.

This shuts off the power to the ignition module,

which stops the spark at the burner. The

safeguard control at this point monitors the flame.







after the lockout occurs, the alarm circuit is powered

up, illuminating the ALARM LED. Manual reset is

now required. Wait 10 seconds before resetting the

control to allow the lockout switch to cool down.


on, the ignition module will be turned back on. A 10-

second re-light trial for ignition is started. The PTFI

LED will illuminate during this time.If a flame signal is

detected, the main gas valves will turn back on and

the ignition module will turn off. If a flame is not

detected during this re-light trial, the pilot gas

solenoid valve and ignition module will shut off. A




CONTROL. Thirty seconds after the alarm lockout

happens the alarm circuit is powered up, illuminating

the ALARM LED. Manual reset is now required. Wait

10 seconds before resetting the control to allow the

lockout switch to cool down.

20.4.2.2 Fireye® M4RT1 Flame Safeguard (FM ≥ 2.5MBH and XL ≥ 1MBH)


Manifold equal or over 2.5M BTU or XL compliant

equal to or over 1M BTU, certain sequences must be

provided in the flame safeguard control. There is a

specified time for pre-purge, trial for ignition, and non

recycle.

1. Timed pre-purgeThis must be a separate purge from the rest of

the system. The trial for ignition must be

delayed by 7 seconds while the blower in the

unit is running. This is to guarantee that there

are no combustible gases or vapors present in

the air stream during burner ignition and light

off.

2. Trial for ignitionThe length of time must be fixed at 10 seconds.

This is to prevent the ignition module from con-


96 of 198

tinuing activating the spark electrode if a haz-

ardous malfunction takes place.

3. Non recycleThis feature prevents the flame safeguard con-

trol from trying to re-light the burner if it should

fail during the ignition cycle or firing cycle.

Instead it goes directly to a lockout condition

and the flame safeguard will need to be manu-

ally reset.

The M4RT1 has a series of 8 jumpers that are used

to configure the Purge timing, Pilot Trial for Ignition

(PTFI) timing, and recycle or non-recycle operation.

See Page 96, Figure 83.

Purge Timing

• Jumpers JP1 through JP5 are used to select the

purge timing for the M4RT1. The available purge

timing selections are 5, 7, 30, 60, and 240

seconds and any additive combination of those

times. Selecting two or more purge timing

jumpers will result in a purge time period equal to

the sum of the jumpers selected. Selection of a

purge time is accomplished by cutting or not

installing the associated jumper. The factory set,

default purge time of 5 seconds (JP1 not installed)

is always selected. See Page 96, Table 38 lists all

available purge times and how to select those by

cutting jumpers JP2 through JP5.

FIGURE 83: Jumper Locations

Table 38: Jumper Settings

Pilot Trial for Ignition• Jumpers JP6 and JP7 are used by the factory

only to select the PTFI for the M4RT1. The factory

set, default PTFI time is 10 seconds (JP6

installed, JP7 not installed). The PTFI time may

only be set by the factory.

Recycle/Non-recycle Operation• Jumper JP8 is used to select either Recycle or

Non-Recycle operation of the M4RT1. The factory

set, default is Recycle operation (JP8 installed).

To select Non-Recycle operation, cut jumper JP8.

20.4.2.3 Fireye® M4RT1 Flame Safeguard Opera-tion (FM ≥ 2.5MBH and XL ≥ 1MBH)


flame safeguard control (that has had its jumpers

changed to comply with the agency requirements)

and the external functions that will take place. Refer

to the drawing below to follow the steps. We will just

trace the electromechanical steps and not the

electronic network.

Purge Time (seconds) JP2 JPS JP4 JP55 Installed Installed Installed Installed

12 Cut Installed Installed Installed

35 Installed Cut Installed Installed

42 Cut Cut Installed Installed

65 Installed Installed Cut Installed


97 of 198


closed. Power is supplied to terminal #7 of the

flame safeguard.







• Following a time delay period (purge cycle) 7

seconds. The electronic network closes a contact

that powers up terminal #3 and terminal #4 in the

safeguard control.







is illuminated.




• It closes an internal contact, which powers up

terminal #5 in the control. This terminal powers up

the main gas valves allowing the main burner to

come on.

• At the same time that the contact in step b closes,

the electronic network opens a contact, which

powers terminal #4. This shuts off the power to

the ignition module, which stops the spark at the

burner. The safeguard control at this point

monitors the flame.







after the lockout has activated, the alarm circuit is

powered up, illuminating the ALARM LED. Manual

reset is now required. Wait 10 seconds before

resetting the control to allow the lockout switch to

cool down.


on, the pilot and main gas valves will be turned off. A




CONTROL. Thirty seconds after the lockout has

activated, the alarm circuit is powered up,

illuminating the ALARM LED. Manual reset is now

required. Wait 10 seconds before resetting the control

to allow the lockout switch to cool down.

FIGURE 84: Honeywell RM7897

20.4.3 Honeywell RM7897 Flame Safeguard

The color of this control is blue and it has a reset

button extending out from it. It consists of three

components, which are:

1. The RM7897 chassis contains the main hard-

ware. It also has mounted on its exterior, five

(5) lights which indicate the operating status of

the control.

2. The ST7800 Purge Timer Card which deter-

mines the pre-purge time for the control -

default is 7 seconds.

3. The R7847 (flame rod) or R7849 (ultraviolet)

rectifier/amplifier module provides the flame

scanning capability and the flame failure

response time. On its exterior are test jacks,

which permit flame signal measurement during

operation.


located on the main chassis, are as follows. They are

listed in the order you will find them on the flame

safeguard. This is also the order in which they will

occur in the sequence.

1. Power - this indicator is on when power is

present at terminal #5 of the flame safeguard.

BURNER CONTROL

BURNER FLAME CONTROL

FLAME AMPLIFIER+-

- Negative + Positive

5.0 VDC


98 of 198

2. Pilot - this indicator comes on when power is

present at terminals #8 and #10 of the flame

safeguard. It indicates that the pilot circuit has

been turned on.

3. Flame - this indicates that a flame signal has

been proven.

4. Main - this indicator comes on after the flame

safeguard has proven out the flame signal. It

also shows that the main valves have been

activated in the equipment. On the safeguard

control, terminal #9 is powered up.

5. Alarm - this indicates that a safety lockout has


failure to ignite.

20.4.3.1 Honeywell RM7897 Flame Safeguard Operation (ANSI, FM < 2.5MBH and XL < 1MBH)


the flame safeguard and the external functions that



network.

• Initiate

• The flame safeguard enters the INITIATE

sequence when the relay module is initially

powered. The INITIATE sequence lasts for ten

seconds.

• Standby

• The flame safeguard is ready to start an operating

sequence when the operating control input,

Terminal #6 receives power.

• Normal Start-Up Pre-purge

• The flame safeguard provides PREPURGE

timing, with the ST7800 Purge Timer card, for

seven with power applied to Terminal #6.

• Ignition Trials

Pilot Flame Establishing Period (PFEP):

A. When the PFEP begins:

1. The pilot valve and ignition

transformer, terminals 8 and 10 are

energized.

2. Flame must be proven by the end

of the ten second PFEP to allow the

sequence to continue. If a flame is not

proven by the end of PFEP, a safety

shutdown occurs.

Main Flame Establishing Period (MFEP):

After PFEP, and with the presence of flame,

the main fuel valve, terminal 9, is powered. If

a flameout occurs, the flame safeguard

recycles within 0.8 or 3 seconds, depending

on the Flame Failure Response Time (FFRT)

of the amplifier.

• Run

The flame safeguard is now in RUN and remains

in RUN until the controller input, terminal 6,

opens, indicating that the demand is satisfied or a

limit has opened.

20.4.3.2 Honeywell RM7897 Flame Safeguard (FM ≥ 2.5MBH and XL ≥ 1MBH)


Manifold equal or over 2.5 M BTU or XL compliant

equal to or over 1 M BTU, certain sequences must be

provided in the flame safeguard control. The

safeguard control must be converted to non recycle

on flame lockout. This is accomplished by configuring

the on board jumpers located on the back side of the

flame safeguard control.

FIGURE 85: Honeywell Safeguard Jumpers

Table 39: Site-Configuration Honeywell Safeguard Jumpers

Jumpers

The relay module has three site-configurable jumper

Jumper Number 7897JR1 Intact

JR2 Remove

JR3 Intact

JR1

JR2

JR3

Selectable Configuration Jumpers


99 of 198

options; See Page 98, Figure 85 and Page 98, Table 39. If necessary, clip the site-configurable jumpers

with side cutters and remove the resistors from the

relay module.

IMPORTANT

Clipping and removing a jumper after 200 hours of

operation causes a non-resettable Fault 110. The

relay module must then be replaced.


the flame safeguard and the external functions that



network.

• Initiate

• The flame safeguard enters the INITIATE

sequence when the relay module is initially

powered. The INITIATE sequence lasts for ten

seconds.

• Standby

• The flame safeguard is ready to start an operating

sequence when the operating control input,

Terminal #6 receives power.

• Normal Start-Up Pre-purge

• The flame safeguard provides PREPURGE

timing, with the ST7800 Purge Timer card, for

seven with power applied to Terminal #6.

• Ignition Trials

Pilot Flame Establishing Period (PFEP):

A. When the PFEP begins:

1. The pilot valve and ignition

transformer, terminals 8 and 10 are

energized.

2. Flame must be proven by the end

of the ten second PFEP to allow the

sequence to continue. If a flame is not

proven by the end of PFEP, a safety

shutdown occurs.

Main Flame Establishing Period (MFEP):

After PFEP, and with the presence of flame,

the main fuel valve, terminal 9, is powered. If

a flameout occurs, the flame safeguard

recycles within 0.8 or 3 seconds, depending

on the Flame Failure Response Time (FFRT)

of the amplifier.

Run

The flame safeguard is now in RUN and remains in

RUN until the controller input, terminal 6, opens,

indicating that the demand is satisfied or a limit has

opened.

20.5 Air Volume Control Options20.5.1 Volumatic Dampers

This is a control option for varying the total delivered

air volume down to 20% of the air handler's

maximum airflow capacity. It is used when the space

demands for make-up air are not at a constant value

due to exhaust fan cycling or environmental changes.

The standard Volumatic control option allows the air

handler's discharge damper to modulate, which in

turns delivers the required airflow.

Methods of control for this option are by a manual

damper position controller (standard with this option),

Space Pressure controller which senses the space

pressure and makes volume changes as required.

The minimum air position is preset from the factory

and may be readjusted in the field by the use of the

minimum air damper positioner, located on the air

handlers control panel. It is adjusted to prevent the

air handler from going below the minimum airflow

required for proper combustion. The profile damper

motor which maintains the proper air pressure drop

across the burner is electrically interlocked with the

discharge damper (master/slave operation). As the

discharge damper opens, the profile damper opens

proportionally to maintain the proper pressure drop

across the burner. As the discharge damper closes,

the profile damper closes.

20.5.2 Volumatic Variable Frequency Drive

This is a control option for varying the total delivered

air volume down to 25% of the air handler's

maximum airflow capacity. It is used when the space

demands for make-up air are not at a constant value

due to exhaust fan cycling or environmental changes.

The VFD control option allows the air handler's

blower vary its speed, which in turns delivers the

required airflow.

Methods of control for this option are by a Keypad

(standard with this option) or Space Pressure

controller which senses the space pressure and

makes volume changes as required.


and may be readjusted in the field by the use of the

VFD's Keypad. It is adjusted to prevent the air

handler from going below the minimum airflow



across the burner is electrically interlocked with VFD


100 of 198

(master/slave operation). As the VFD speeds the

blower up, the profile damper opens proportionally to

maintain the proper pressure drop across the burner.

As the VFD slows the blower down, the profile

damper closes.

20.5.3 Two Position Volumatic

This control package allows the unit to deliver two Air

Volume requirements, one at 100% of the unit's

required capacity, the other to be set between 25% -

100% of capacity. The method of control for this

system is an interlock contact provided by others, or

by contacts that is dictated by the sequence of

operation.

High Air Volume Position

When switched to the High Air Volume position, the

discharge damper opens fully (100%). The burner

profile motor adjusts the burner profile blades to

attain proper pressure drop across the burner.

Low Air Volume Position

When switched to the Low Air Volume position, the

discharge damper opens to a setting of between

25% -100% open. This position is to be manually

preset by the Minimum Air Potentiometer which is

located in the air handler's control panel. The burner

profile motor closes the burner profile blades to

provide the correct pressure drop across the burner

for proper burner combustion. As the profile motor

closes, its motor end switch opens, putting the

Maximum Fire Potentiometer (located in the air

handler's control panel) into the circuit. The

Maximum Fire Potentiometer reduces the maximum

firing rate of the burner in the low Air Volume position

preventing the burner from over-firing.

20.5.4 Two Speed Volumatic

This control package, through the use of a two-speed

blower motor allows the unit to deliver two Air Volume

requirements. One at 100% of unit's required

capacity, the other determined by the speed of the

blower motor. The method of control for this system is

an interlock contact provided by others, or by

contacts that is dictated by the sequence of

operation.

High Air Volume Operation

When switched to the high speed position, the unit

will deliver 100% of its designed airflow. The burner

profile motor opens the burner profile blades to attain

proper pressure drop across the burner.

Low Air Volume Operation

When switched to the low speed position, the blower

motor switches to low speed providing low Air

Volume operation. The burner profile motor closes

the burner profile blades to provide the correct

pressure drop across the burner for proper burner

combustion. As the profile motor closes, its motor

end switch opens, putting the Maximum Fire

Potentiometer (located in the air handler's control

panel) into the circuit. The Maximum Fire

Potentiometer reduces the maximum firing rate of the

burner in the low Air Volume position preventing the

burner from over-firing.

20.5.5 Volumatic/Recirculating

This option has modulating inlet (optional),

modulating return air dampers and modulating

burner profile blades. The Volumatic/Recirculation

system is similar to the Volumatic package but varies

the mixture of recirculated air back into the unit, while

still maintaining a constant supply Air Volume. The

inlet damper can only be closed down to a minimum

of 20% of the maximum capacity of the air handler

unit, to maintain proper combustion. This system is

used when the total volume of air supplied must be

kept constant in order to properly distribute the air

throughout the building.

Methods of control for this option are by a manual

damper position controller (standard with this option)

or Space Pressure controller which senses the space

pressure and makes volume changes as required.


and maybe readjusted in the field by the use of the

minimum air damper positioner, located on the air

handlers control panel. It is adjusted to prevent the

air handler from going below the minimum airflow



across the burner is electrically interlocked with

either the optional inlet damper or the return air

damper (master/slave operation). If equipped with

the optional inlet damper, as the inlet damper opens,

the profile damper opens proportionally to maintain

the proper pressure drop across the burner. As the

inlet closes, the profile damper closes. If not

equipped with an inlet damper, as the return air

damper opens, the profile damper closes

proportionally to maintain the pressure drop across

the burner. As the return as damper closes, the

profile damper opens.


101 of 198

20.5.6 Space Pressure Controller With Minimum Air

This option uses a building pressure sensor (for DDC

controls) or differential pressure switch [photohelic

optional] (for conventional relay logic controls) to

monitor differential pressure between the outside of

the space (typically outside the structure) and the

heated space. The air handler will ensure proper air

delivery by using a discharge damper, inlet/

recirculating dampers or VFD to modify the airflow

when a pressure change is required. The pressure

drop across the burner is maintained by the

motorized profile dampers which are set up

electrically as a Master/Slave. Most installations

require a set point of 0.01 in wc to 0.02 in wc to

achieve adequate pressure control in the building.

20.5.7 Electronic Space Pressure Control

This is a solid state controller that monitors the space

serviced by the air handler and a reference point

(usually outside the structure) for pressure

differential. It maintains the selected pressure set

point by varying the output of airflow from the handler

using various options.

20.6 Night Setback Options20.6.1 Night Setback with Occupied/Unoccupied Switch

This option provides manual control of occupied and

unoccupied cycles, operated by an occupied/

unoccupied switch. It includes a line voltage room

thermostat (shipped loose) and an occupied/

unoccupied switch (mounted on remote panel).

During the unoccupied cycle, the air handler remains

off until the room thermostat calls for heat. At that

time, the air handler goes to a standard daytime

sequence until the thermostat is satisfied.

20.6.2 Night Setback with Electro-Mechanical Time Clock

This option provides automatic control of occupied and unoccupied cycles, operated by an electromechanical time clock. It includes a seven-day electro-mechanical time clock (shipped loose). The time clock can be set for different on and off times any of the days during the seven-day period. During the unoccupied cycle, the air handler remains off until the room thermostat calls for heat. At that time, the air handler goes to a standard daytime sequence until the thermostat is satisfied.

20.6.3 Night Setback with Electronic Time Clock

This option provides automatic control of occupied and unoccupied cycles, operated by an electric time clock. It includes a seven-day electronic time clock (mounted on the remote panel). The time clock can be set for different on and off times any of the days during the seven-day period. During the unoccupied cycle, the air handler remains off until the room thermostat calls for heat. At that time, the air handler goes to a standard daytime sequence until the thermostat is satisfied.


102 of 198

20.7 Other Control Options20.7.1 Exhaust Fan Interlock - Exhaust Fan Starts Air Handler

This option provides an interlock between an exhaust

fan and an air handler. It includes a break in the

control circuitry to which wiring from an auxiliary set

of contacts on the starter of an exhaust fan can be

connected.

20.7.1.1 Exhaust Fan Interlock - Air Handler Starts Exhaust Fan

This option provides an interlock between an exhaust

fan and an air handler. It includes wiring from an

auxiliary set of contacts on the air handlers blower

motor starter to start the exhaust fan.

20.7.2 Burner On/Off Outdoor Thermostat

This option de-energizes the burner circuit when the

outside air temperature meets or exceeds the

thermostat's set point. It includes a thermostat and

outside air sensor. The range of thermostat is 25 -

100 °F (-3.9 - 37.8 °C).

20.7.3 Low Limit Control - (With Thermostat Timer and Relay)

This option shuts down the air handler when the

discharge temperature falls below the controller's set

point. It includes a solid-state controller with timer

and a thermistor-type discharge air temperature

probe. The temperature range of the controller is 30 -

75 °F (-1.1 - 17.9 °C) and the timer range of the

controller is 1-10 minutes. The controller is typically

set for 35 °F (1.7 °C) and a 5-minute time delay in

order to allow a warm-up period for the air handler

when first being energized.

NOTE: The low limit control is recommended where

freeze protection is needed in the event of burner

shutdown.

20.7.4 Unit Mounted On/Off Switch

This option provides manual on and off operation of

the air handler. It includes a single-pole, single-throw

(SPST) toggle switch (mounted in the air handler's

control panel).

20.7.5 Post-Purge Timer and Relay

This option allows the supply fan on the equipment to

run for a timed period (adjustable 1 to 100 minutes)

after burner shutdown. It includes timer (mounted on

air handler).

20.7.6 Pre-Purge Timer and Relay

This option allows the supply fan on the equipment to

run for a timed period (adjustable 0.1 to 15 minutes)

before allowing the burner to fire and run. It includes

timer (mounted on air handler).

20.7.7 Clogged Filter Switch with Indicator Light

This option monitors the differential pressure drop

across the filters and, when it meets or exceeds the

set point, illuminates a light mounted on the remote

panel. It includes a pressure differential switch

(mounted on the air handler) and an indicator light

(mounted on the remote panel).

20.7.8 Audible Alarm for Flame Failure

This option sounds an alarm upon burner failure. It

includes an alarm device (mounted on the air

handler's control panel).

20.7.9 Ultra Violet Flame Supervision

This option includes a Ultra Violet scanner mounted

on the burner in lieu of a flame rod with the

appropriate amplifier in the flame safeguard.

20.7.10 Unit Mounted Discharge Sensor

In this option the discharge temperature sensor is

mounted in the blower's housing and is wired directly

back to the air handler's control panel.

20.7.11 Circuit Analyzer Indicators (Watchman)

This, depending on the options ordered, option

consists of up to eleven indicators. The indicator

lights can either be mounted in the air handler's

control panel or on the remote panel option to aid in

troubleshooting the air handler.

20.7.12 Service Receptacle Powered by Others

This option provides a service receptacle. It includes

ground-fault interrupter (GFI) receptacle (mounted on

the air handler). Power to the receptacle is supplied

by the installer.

20.7.13 Service Receptacle with a 7 Amp Power Source from Air Handler


103 of 198

This option provides a service receptacle. It includes

ground-fault interrupter (GFI) receptacle (mounted on

the air handler). Power to the receptacle is supplied

by a 7A power source from the air handler itself.

20.7.14 UL-Listed Flame Control Panel

This option provides for the air handler's control

panel to be built to Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

standards. It includes an UL label on the control

panel.

20.7.15 Filter Gauge

The air filter gauge (unit mounted) measures

pressure drop across the filter for the purpose of

determining whether or not the filter is operating

within its design range of effective utilization.

20.7.16 Carbon Dioxide Detector

All air handlers that recirculate air from the heated

space require the use of a room carbon dioxide

sensor which is set to maintain a CO2 concentration

below 5,000 ppm. (Shipped loose for field

installation)

20.7.17 Carbon Monoxide Detector

This is a ship loose sensor that monitors the CO

levels in the space. It can either sound an alarm and/

or control the function of the air handler in the event

its threshold set point is exceeded.

20.7.18 Proof of Closure Valve

This is a calibrated valve that is tied into the control

system of the burner. It does not allow the burner to

begin the ignition cycle if it is not in the closed

position.

20.7.19 Electronic Space Pressure Control

This is a solid state controller that monitors the space

serviced by the air handler and a reference point

(usually outside the structure) for pressure

differential. It maintains the selected pressure set

point by varying the output of airflow from the handler

using various options.


104 of 198

SECTION 21: TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

The standard temperature controls supplied with the

air handler are manufactured by Maxitrol Company®.

The type of controls are identified by a "series" type

The ones used on Weather-Rite LLC equipment are;

Series 14, 44, 94 and "M".

21.1 System Overview For All Series

In describing the operation of the temperature control

system it will be reduced to its basic level.

• When a set point is selected on the dial, a

resistance value (ohms) is determined. This value

is sent to the amplifier.

• The discharge sensor monitoring the temperature

sends its resistance value to the amplifier.

• The amplifier then converts these resistance

values to a voltage signal that its internal

components can work with. The amplifier's goal is

to have a balanced system. It does this by

generating a modulating D.C. voltage signal to the

metering valve.

The voltage signal generated by the amplifier has a

range of 0 to 30 volts D.C. Between 0 to 5 volts is

considered to be low fire while above 17 volts is

considered high fire. The voltage signal between 5

and 17 volts is the modulation portion of the

temperature control system. The metering valve will

respond to this signal by either increasing or

decreasing the gas flow to the burner. For more

detailed information, refer to the manufacturer's

literature supplied with the air handler.

The temperature control system components are

factory calibrated to a base resistance so that

component replacement will not upset the system

calibration. If the temperature control system should

require field calibration, refer to the provided

temperature control amplifier product information

sheet.

21.1.1 System Components For Series 14• Temperature Selectors

These are non-temperature-sensing controls,

which are used to select the supply air

temperature desired during heating operation. It is

generally located on the cover of the remote panel

and is field wired back to the amplifier.

• Discharge SensorThis is a thermistor sensor mounted in a mixing or

averaging tube. It monitors the temperature of the

air being delivered into the discharge duct.

Resistance decreases as its temperature

increases. The sensor is located such that the

averaging tube protrudes into the discharge duct.

NOTE: This is a field-installed device and location

is critical. Make sure this sensor in mounted in the

area of ductwork that has the most amount of air

moving through it. Recommended distance from

air handler is 6 to 16 feet.

• AmplifierThis is a solid state control that receives its input

signal from the temperature selectors and

discharge sensor. From this it produces the

control voltage signal that is sent to the metering

valve to control the discharge temperature of the

unit. The amplifier is powered by a 24 volts AC

step down transformer.

DANGER







105 of 198

FIGURE 86: Series 14 Components

21.1.2 System Components For Series 44• Space Temperature Sensors / Selectors

These are combined temperature sensing /

selection devices used to control the space to the

temperature desired during heating operations. It

is generally located on the cover of the remote

panel and is field wired back to the amplifier.

• Discharge SensorThis is a thermistor sensor mounted in a mixing or

averaging tube. It monitors the temperature of the

air being delivered into the discharge duct.

Resistance decreases as its temperature

increases. The sensor is located such that the

averaging tube protrudes into the discharge duct.











unit. This amplifier also determines the minimum

and maximum discharge temperature. The

amplifier is powered by a 24 V AC step down

transformer.



106 of 198

21.1.3 System Components For Series 94• Dual Temperature Selectors with LED Display

These are non-temperature-sensing controls

which set the temperature required in the spray

cycle and in the dry cycle, while displaying the

actual average temperature in the discharge duct.

It is generally located on the cover of the remote

panel and connects to the amplifier via a ribbon

cable.

• Discharge SensorThis is a Platinum Positive Coefficient RTD sensor

mounted in a mixing or averaging tube. It monitors

the temperature of the air being delivered into the

discharge duct. Platinum is the material that the

sensor is made out of. Positive coefficient means

that its resistance increases as its temperature

increases. RTD is an acronym for Resistance

Temperature Detector. As its name implies, the

sensor is located such that the averaging tube

protrudes into the discharge duct.











unit. The amplifier is supplied with 24 volts AC

and is located inside the remote control panel.

Besides signaling the valve, the amplifier also

sends a signal to the LED display (located

between the temperature selectors). This signal

is used to illuminate the LED; displaying the

average temperature the discharge sensor is

seeing.


21.1.4 System Components For Series MP2 And MP2+

• Programmable Temperature Selector with LED DisplayThese are non-temperature-sensing controls

which set the temperature required in the spray

cycle and in the dry cycle, while displaying the

actual average temperature in the discharge duct.

It is generally located on the cover of the remote

panel and connects to the amplifier via a ribbon

cable.

• Discharge SensorThis is a Platinum Positive Coefficient RTD sensor

mounted in a mixing or averaging tube. It monitors

the temperature of the air being delivered into the

discharge duct. Platinum is the material that the

sensor is made out of. Positive coefficient means


107 of 198

that its resistance increases as its temperature

increases. RTD is an acronym for Resistance

Temperature Detector. As its name implies, the

sensor is located such that the averaging tube

protrudes into the discharge duct.











unit. The amplifier is supplied with 24 volts AC

and is located inside the remote control panel.

Besides signaling the valve, the amplifier also

sends a signal to the LED display (located

between the temperature selectors). This signal is

used to illuminate the LED; displaying the average

temperature the discharge sensor is seeing. The

amplifier for the MP2+ system (designated

AMO2+) allows for up to 8 separate programs to

be entered and stored while the standard MP2

amplifier only allows one program to be entered.

• Auxiliary Multifunctional Timer Control (optional)Any of the eight processes can be timed. The

conclusion of a timed Process will immediately

proceed into the next Process. If the last Process

of the program is timed, it will proceed to the

selected start position after timing out. The

controller features two Timers (Timer 1 and Timer

2) that accumulate the hours of operation for each

Process. Each Process has a Timer 1 and a Timer

2. Timer 1 logs the hours of operation for a

Process. It also has a programmable alarm setting

to notify the user when the desired accumulated

hours for the Process have been reached. Timer 2

logs the hours of operation for a Process.

FIGURE 89: Series MP Components


108 of 198

SECTION 22: DIRECT FIRED BURNER

The burner used by Weather-Rite is manufactured by Midco International®, Inc., Model HMA-2A. The HMA-

2A is used for natural gas and propane (LP). The burner combines the two main ingredients needed for

proper combustion air (oxygen) and fuel (gas whether natural or manufactured). In this burner raw gas is

delivered to the burner ports at low pressure. The air passing across the burner is maintained between 2,500

and 3,200 feet per minute. The arrangement and shape of the air holes in the baffles surrounding the burner

provide the amount of air required for proper combustion for all of the firing rates.

WARNING

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, electric shock, injury or property damage.

Burn Hazard

Allow heater to cool before service.

Tubing may still be hot after operation.

Explosion Hazard

Leak test all compo-nents of gas piping before operation.

Gas can leak if piping is not installed properly.

Do not high pressure test gas piping with equipment connected.

DANGER



More than one disconnect switch may be required to disconnect electric from heater.

Heater must be connected to a properly grounded electrical source.


Heaters installed unvented must be interlocked with sufficient building exhaust.

Heaters must be installed according to the installation manual.


109 of 198

FIGURE 90: Midco HMA-2A Burner

22.1 Direct Fired Burner Ignition

The burner that is used in the Weather-Rite LLC unit

is equipped with a pilot assembly. The pilot assembly

consists of a pilot gas tube, spark electrode or rod

and either a flame rod with grounding assembly or

UV scanner. For proper ignition the spark rod must

be adjusted correctly. A high voltage arc is generated

between the spark rod and the pilot gas tube. The

gas flowing out the ports in the pilot gas tube is

ignited by this arc. The arc will be a brilliant electric

blue in color. See Page 109, Figure 90.

The gas supplied to the pilot gas tube should be 3 1/

2" wc for natural gas and between 9 to 11" wc for

propane or LP. The difference between the two fuels

is that a restricting orifice is installed in the propane

or LP pilot gas tube. The pilot assembly can be used

on propane or LP without an orifice, if this is the case

then the pressure for LP is 2.0"w.c. Ignition will take

place with the introduction of gas to the pilot gas

tube. The pilot flame will be mostly blue in color with

streaks of yellow. The flame size will be roughly 2" in

diameter. The flame must be steady and consistent

in size.


110 of 198

22.2 Direct Fired Burner Flame Proving (Flame Rod)

The flame rod in the burner is constructed of a

material that produces a signal when heated. This

signal is measured as a direct current micro amp.

The path of the signal is from the flame rod to the

burner. From the burner, which is mechanically

grounded to the unit casing, the signal continues to

the grounded side of the flame rectification module in

the flame safeguard control. The signal continues out

of the module to the flame rod where it completes the

loop.

The length the flame rod extends into the burner is

determined by the insulator surrounding the rod. This

insulator must not be exposed more than 1/8" into

the burner and not recessed more than 1/8". At this

setting the flame rod will be enveloped by the pilot or

main flame. It will be glowing bright red along at least

50% of its length. See Page 109, Figure 90.

FIGURE 91: Spark Rod Dimensions

NOTE: For the flame rod to produce this signal its

position in relation to the grounding rod, pilot and

main flame is critical.

The flame rectification module of the flame safeguard

control converts this signal to a D.C. voltage. This

voltage is the value that is used to monitor the pilot

and the main flame of the burner.

For the flame safeguard control to recognize this

signal the value of the voltage must be between 5 to

10 volts D.C. and it must be steady. This signal is

measured at the flame relay, on the rectification

module's test jacks; S1 (colored red) and S2 (colored

black).

Upon receiving the correct signal, the flame relay will

accept this as proof that the burner is functioning

correctly and will proceed with its functions.

B

C

E

D

A

WARNING: the ignition system on the air handler generates between 6,000 to 10,000 volts.

A B C D E

in 2.940 0.125 0.125 1.881 0.633

cm 7.468 0.318 0.318 4.778 1.608


111 of 198

22.3 Direct Fired Burner Flame Proving (Ultra Violet Scanner)

The UV tube is made of quartz and is filled with a gas

that ionizes when struck by UV radiation from the

flame. In the absence of UV radiation, the gas acts

as an insulator between two electrodes which are

mounted inside the tube. These electrodes are

energized continuously by a high voltage. During

combustion, UV radiation ionizes the gas, causing

current pulses to flow between the electrodes. These

current pulses result in a flame signal which is

transmitted to the amplifier in the control where it is

processed to energize or hold in the flame relay.

FIGURE 92: Ultra Violet Sensor

The flame rectification module of the flame safeguard

control converts this signal to a D.C. voltage. This

voltage is the value that is used to monitor the pilot

and the main flame of the burner. For the flame

safeguard control to recognize this signal the value of

the voltage must be between 5 to

10 volts D.C. and it must be steady. This signal is

measured at the flame relay, on the rectification

module's test jacks; S1 (colored red) and S2 (colored

black). Upon receiving the correct signal, the flame

relay will accept this as proof that the burner is

functioning correctly and will proceed with its

functions.

FIGURE 93: Ultra Violet Scanner Mounting


112 of 198

SECTION 23: DIRECT FIRED PROCESS AIR HEATERS

This section applies to direct gas-fired process air

heaters of the recirculating or non-recirculating type.

During the process heating cycle (bake or cure)

excess Carbon Monoxide is produced and all entry

into the controlled space is prohibited. Exhaust

systems must be provided for proper operation and

no entry is allowed into the space during the high

temperature or baking cycle. This equipment is to

provide process heating to non-occupied spaces and

may also include operation as a non-recirculating

ventilation air heater. This heater may or may not be

used in a paint booth application.

The intent of this section is to supply the required

information concerning installation and operation of






Do not enter equipment while in operation.

Equipment may start automatically.

Do not operate with door open.

Installation, operation and service must be done by a trained technician only.

DANGER

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, electrical shock or injury.

Explosion Hazard

Leak test all compo-nents of equipment gas piping before operation.


Do not high pressure test gas piping with equipmentconnected.

Carbon MonoxideHazard



Falling Hazard

Use proper safety equipment and practices to avoid falling.

Do not use any part of equipment as support.

Burn Hazard

Allow equipment to cool before service.

Internal components of equipment may still be hot after operation.

WARNING



113 of 198

the process air heater in compliance with:

United States: Refer to NFPA 86 - latest revision,

Ovens and Furnaces /ANSI Z83.25 - latest revision,

Direct Gas-Fired Process Air Heaters.

Canada: Refer to CSA 3.19 - latest revision, Direct

Gas-Fired Process Air Heaters.

23.1 Direct Fired Process Air Heater Models• 100% Outside Air - Ventilating and Baking Cycle

Mode

• 100% Outside Air - Ventilating with Reduced

Airflow for Bake Cycle Mode

• 100% Outside Air - Ventilating with Recirculation

for Baking Cycle Model (80% Recirculated Air

after the burner and 20% Outside Air)

• 100% Outside Air - Ventilating with Recirculation

for Baking Cycle Model (90% Recirculated Air

across the burner and 10% Outside Air)

Other terms may be used to describe the bake cycle

mode such as; Cure or Cure Time Cycle, Dry or

Drying Cycle, and Flash Kick Cycle. Ventilation air

and the term outside air are also used

interchangeably.

All process heaters come equipped with two High

Limit discharge controllers, one for the ventilation

cycle - maximum 160 °F (71 °C) (automatic reset)

and one for the bake cycle mode - maximum 300 °F

(149 °C) (manual reset). The discharge temperature

controller limits the temperature to a maximum

250 °F (121 °C).

23.2 Installer's Responsibilities1. All access opening(s) to the heated space,

served by the Process Heater that can be used

by personnel to enter the space, must have

door interlock switch or switches to shut down

the Process Heater if entry is attempted during

the bake cycle.

2. On recirculation Process Heaters, the return air

duct from the served space must have filters

installed to prevent particulate matter from

entering the heater. If not supplied by the Pro-

cess Heater, then the installer must supply

them. These filters must be approved by the

authority having jurisdiction of the installation.

3. The return air duct system must be installed

with doors, panels or other means for access to

facilitate inspection, maintenance, cleaning

and access to fire protection devices.

4. Instructions must be provided to require peri-

odic inspection and cleaning of the recircula-

tion air duct. The installer must supply this

information.

5. The gas piping installer must locate a manual

emergency gas shutoff valve in an appropriate

location that allows access to shut off the flow

of gas to the Process Heater in case of an

emergency.

6. If a post purge (cool-down) cycle is not sup-

plied with the Process Heater, then the installer

must supply a timing circuit that allows 100%

ventilation air of the space to cool the products

down and purge any airborne contaminants.

See Page 113, Figure 94

FIGURE 94: Cool Down Cycle Circuit

7. It is also suggested that the following Burn

Hazard Warning be installed at all access

opening(s) to the heated space, served by the

Process Heater, that can be used by personnel

to enter the space. If additional burn hazard

warnings are needed, contact Weather-Rite

-f

-

-

A

B

TO MAIN POWER

f f

f

f

f

f f

f

FUSE F2 FUSE F3

120 V

CONTROL TRANSFORMER

COOL DOWN

TIMER COIL*HEATER

RUN CONTACT

BAKE CYCLE

AUXILARY CONTACT

SUMMER/OFF/WINTER SWITCH*

1

1

15

16

17

3

4

13

5

15

COOL DOWN TIMER CONTACT

SUPPLY FAN OVERLOADS

SUPPLY FAN CONTACTOR COIL

SUPPLY FAN AUXILIARY CONTACT

SUPPLY FAN AIR FLOW SWITCH

VOLUME AIR FLOW SWITCH

TERMINAL LOCATED ON MAIN PANEL

TERMINAL LOCATED ON REMOTE STATION

FIELD WIRING

KEY;

WIN.SUM.

OFF

135

FUSE F1

2

2


114 of 198

LLC or WEATHER-RITE™ independent distrib-

utor.

FIGURE 95: Burn Hazard

8. The space serviced by the Process Heater,

during the bake cycle mode must have its light-

ing turned off. If not supplied by the process

heater, then the installer must electrically inter-

lock the facility lights with the bake cycle. See Page 113, Figure 94.

FIGURE 96: Lighting Interlock Circuit

9. Process Heaters in the baking cycle mode

require a minimum of 200 CFM of ventilation

air per 1000 CFH of fuel gas for proper com-

bustion. If the Process Heater does not come

equipped with the features to meet this require-

ment, then the installer must provide the

method to accomplish it.

NOTE: Process Heaters supplied by Weather-Rite

LLC are available with the options required to satisfy

this requirement.

A. Reduced Airflow Process Heaters

• Variable Frequency Drive control of the Process

Heater's airflow comes with either:

• Manual or motorized burner profile dampers

• Process Heaters that deliver up to and including

20,000 CFM may be supplied with manual burner

profile dampers. These models are limited to a

CFM reduction of 50% of the maximum ventilating

air capacity of that particular model.

• Process Heaters supplied with motorized burner

profile dampers, may be reduced to a CFM

reduction of 20% of the maximum ventilating air

capacity of that particular model.

B. Discharge Damper control of the Process Heater's

airflow comes with either:

• Manual or motorized profile dampers

• Process Heaters that deliver up to and including

20,000 CFM may be supplied with manual burner

profile dampers. These models are limited to a

CFM reduction of 50% of the maximum ventilating

air capacity of that particular model.

• Process Heaters supplied with motorized burner

profile dampers, may be reduced to a CFM

reduction of 20% of the maximum ventilating air

capacity of that particular model.

C. 90/10 Recirculation Process Heaters

• The installer must ensure that the Outside Air

Damper, when supplied by Weather-Rite LLC, is

set to provide proper airflow for combustion and to

make sure the recirculation air is properly diluted

during the bake cycle mode. This is accomplished

by ensuring the bypass feature of the ventilating

air damper is not blocked by the installation or that

the minimum position control of the ventilating air

damper is functioning properly.

23.3 Installer's Responsibility for Process Heaters Connected to Paint Booths

1. If the exhaust control system is not supplied by

the Process Heater, then the installer must

electrically interlock the exhaust system with

the heater. See Page 115, Figure 97.

WARNING

Burn Hazard



Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury.

TO MAIN POWER

f f

fFUSE F2

FUSE F1

120 V

CONTROL TRANSFORMER

LIGHTING CONTACTOR COIL



FIELD WIRING

BAKE CYCLE MODE

ACTIVATION RELAY CONTACT

1

1

f

f

LIGHT SWITCH

KEY;

f

OFF ON

f2 2

FUSE F3

-

-

-

C1


115 of 198

FIGURE 97: Exhaust Interlock Circuit

2. If a purge cycle between ventilation cycle mode

and the bake cycle mode is not supplied with

the Process Heater, then the installer must

supply a purge timer that delays the bake cycle

from operating for a minimum of 3 minutes or

at least 4 air changes of the space. See Page 115, Figure 98.

FIGURE 98: Purge Circuit

3. The space serviced by the Process Heater,

during the purging cycle and bake cycle mode

must have all spray equipment turned off. If not

supplied by the Process Heater, then the

installer must electrically interlock the spray

equipment with the Process Heater. See Page 115, Figure 99.

FIGURE 99: Spray Equipment Interlock Circuit

23.4 WEATHER-RITE™ Control Packages

Various control packages are available to

complement the process heaters. These control

packages interlock with the exhaust systems, lighting

circuits, spraying equipment. These packages ensure

purging of the space (3 minutes minimum with

adjustability to lengthen if process requires) takes

place before the bake cycle is initialized and also

supplies a cool-down cycle (operator adjustable) for

after the bake cycle. All packages are available with

optional exhaust system variable frequency drive.

23.4.1 : WRP- 1 Remote Control Station - 100% Ventilation Air

1. Description:

• NEMA1 hinged control panel.

• Summer-Off-Winter switch.

• Three system indicating lights; Blower, Burner

and Flame Failure.

• Maxitrol "M" Series temperature set point with

digital temperature indicator.

• Booth Lighting On/Off Switch, fusing and contactor (supply power for lights by others).

f

A

B

1

-

-

-

THE N/O AUXILIARY CONTACT OF A

PROCESS’ EXHAUST FAN(S)

SHOULD BE CONNECTED BETWEEN

TERMINALS #1 AND #1 UNLESS THE

PROCESS HEATER IS DIRECTLY

CONNECTED TO THE SYSTEM

TO MAIN POWER

f f

fFUSE F2 FUSE F3

CONTROL TRANSFORMER



WIRE TO EXH. FAN CIRCUIT

EXHAUST FAN AIR FLOW SWITCH

NOTE: REMOVE JUMPER WIRE BETWEEN 17 & 17

IF EXHAUST AIR FLOW SWITCH IS USED

SUPPLY FAN CONTACTOR COIL


17

3

4



KEY;



FIELD WIRING

13

5

16

17

f f

f

f f f

2

f

f

f

ff

f 14 14

1513

OFF

WIN.SUM.

5

120 V

FUSE F1

KEY;

2 fSUM.

A

B

OFFWIN.

2

TO MAIN POWER

f

FUSE F2

FUSE F1

FUSE F3

120 V

CONTROL TRANSFORMER

PURE TIMER


TERMINAL LOCATED ON REMOTE PANEL

FIELD WIRING

BAKE CYCLE

START CONTACT14

5

5

1

1

ff

f

f

13

5


f f

f

f

BAKE CYCLE

ACTIVATION RELAY

-f

-

-

*

KEY;KEY;-

-

-

f

TO MAIN POWERFUSE F2

FUSE F1

FUSE F3

120 V

CONTROL TRANSFORMER



SUPPLY FAN CONTACTOR COIL 2

SPRAY AIR SUPPLY SOLENOID



FIELD WIRING

fff13

5




BAKE CYCLE

AUXILIARY CONTACT

3

f f 4

16

17

14

14

13

A

B5

f f

f

1

1

WIN.

OFF

SUM.

f

f

f

f


116 of 198

2.Operation:

• Switch in "Summer" position for fan only or

"Winter" position for fan and burner.

• Process Heater's discharge damper (if

equipped) opens to 100% open position.

• Exhaust fan starts and after a timed delay, the

supply fan comes on In the winter position,

temperature based on paint temperature set

point.

FIGURE 100: WRP-1

23.4.2 WRP- 2 Remote Control Station - 100% Ventilation Air / Reduced Airflow Dry Cycle

1. Description:




and Flame Failure.

• Spray gun interlock.

• Dry Purge Timer and Cool-Down timer.

• Mechanical Dry timer (0-60 minutes).



• Booth Lighting On/Off Switch, fusing and

contactor (supply power for lights by others).

2.Operation - Paint Mode:



• Process Heater's discharge damper opens to

100% open position.


supply fan comes on.

• In the winter position, temperature based on

paint temperature set point.

• Booth lights operated by on/off switch.

3.Operation - Dry Mode:

• Activate switch to either "Summer" or "Winter"

position.

• Turn Dry Cycle Start Timer to desired time

(activates the Dry cycle).

• Spray gun solenoid and booth lights are shut

off.

• Purge timer is activated, purging booth with

100% ventilation air (operating as if in paint

mode).

• Process Heater's discharge damper re-

positions to 50% airflow position, exhaust fan

operates at 50% airflow.

• Temperature based on dry temperature set

point.

• When dry cycle is completed, cool-down cycle

is activated. Booth lights remain off.

• During cool-down cycle, the process heater

and exhaust fan revert to 100% ventilation air

(operating as if in paint mode).

• Process Heater and exhaust fan shut down

after cool-down cycle.

FIGURE 101: WRP-2

BLOWER

BURNER

FLAME FAILURE SUMMER OFF WINTER

OFF ON

LIGHTS

TEMP CONTROLLER

PGM

MAXITROL

ENT

BLOWER

BURNER


OFF ON

LIGHTS

TEMP CONTROLLER

PGM

MAXITROL

ENT

20

5

3540

2530

45

50

55

60HOLD 0

15

10

DRY CYCLE START


117 of 198

23.4.3 WRP - 3 Remote Control Station - 100% Ventilation Air / Reduced Airflow Dry Cycle - VFD Exhaust

1. Description:




and Flame Failure.








• Manual balancing pot for adjusting exhaust fan

speed in the paint mode.

• Booth pressure gauge (Dwyer 4" Magnehelic®),

monitors booth pressure.




• Process Heater's discharge damper opens to

100% open position.






• Booth balancing pot provides fine tune

adjustment of exhaust fan speed to maintain

booth pressure.



position.


(activates the dry cycle).


off.



mode).

• Process Heater's discharge damper re-


operates at 50% airflow.

• Temperature based on Dry temperature set

point.

• When Dry cycle is completed, cool-down cycle


• During cool-down cycle, the Process Heater




after cool-down cycle

FIGURE 102: WRP-3

23.4.4 WRP - 3R Remote Control Station - 100% Ventilation Air and 90/10 Recirculating Cure Sys-tem - VFD Exhaust

1. Description:




and Flame Failure.








• Manual balancing pot for adjusting exhaust fan

speed in the paint mode.

BOOTH BALANCING POTBOOTH PRESSURE

BURNER

BLOWER


OFF ON

LIGHTS

TEMP CONTROLLER

PGM

MAXITROL

ENT

20

5

3540

2530

45

50

55

60HOLD 0

15

10

DRY CYCLE START

YOU CAN'T SEE IT!

IS SO DAMN SMALL THAT

SIGNIFICANCE BECAUSE IT

INFORMATION OF NO

THIS APPARENTLY SOME

MAGNEHELIC

1"

0

1"


118 of 198






• Process Heater ventilation air damper opens to

100% open position.








booth pressure.



position.




off.



mode).

• After purge cycle, Process Heater's dampers

re-position to 10% ventilation air & 90 % return

air for Dry cycle. Exhaust fan speed reduces

down to 10% airflow.


point.








FIGURE 103: WRP-3R

23.4.5 WRP- 4 Remote Control Station - 100% Ventilation Air / Reduced Airflow Dry Cycle - Auto Balance

1. Description:




and Flame Failure.








• Booth pressure gauge controller (Dwyer 4"

Photohelic®), monitors and automatically

adjusts exhaust fans to maintain booth

pressure.




• Process Heater discharge damper opens to

100% open position.



BOOTH BALANCING POTBOOTH PRESSURE

BURNER

BLOWER


OFF ON

LIGHTS

TEMP CONTROLLER

PGM

MAXITROL

ENT

20

5

3540

2530

45

50

55

60HOLD 0

15

10

DRY CYCLE START

YOU CAN'T SEE IT!



INFORMATION OF NO


MAGNEHELIC

1"

0

1"


119 of 198






position.




off.



mode).

• "Process Heater's discharge damper re-


automatically adjusts airflow to maintain the

pressure setting of the pressure controller.


point.



• During cool-down, Process Heater and the

exhaust fan revert to 100% airflow position




FIGURE 104: WRP-4

23.4.6 WRP- 4R Remote Control Station 90/10 Recirculating Cure System - Auto Balance

1. Description:

• NEMA1 hinged control panel

• Summer-Off-Winter switch

• Three (3) system indicating lights; Blower,

Burner and Flame Failure

• Spray gun interlock

• Dry Purge Timer and Cool-Down timer

• Mechanical Dry timer (0-60 minutes)


digital temperature indicator


contactor (supply power for lights by others)

• Booth pressure gauge controller (Dwyer 4"

Photohelic), monitors and automatically adjusts

exhaust fans to maintain booth pressure



"Winter" position for fan and burner

• Process Heater's dampers opens to 100%

ventilation position


supply fan comes on


paint temperature set point

• Booth lights operated by on/off switch

• Dry mode:


position


(activates the Dry cycle)


off



mode)

• Process Heater's dampers re-positions to 10%

ventilation air and 90% return air, exhaust fan

automatically adjusts airflow to maintain the

pressure setting of the pressure controller.


point



BOOTH PRESSURE

BURNER

BLOWER


OFF ON

LIGHTS

TEMP CONTROLLER

PGM

MAXITROL

ENT

20

5

3540

2530

45

50

55

60HOLD 0

15

10

DRY CYCLE START

PHOTOHELIC

1"

4

1"


120 of 198

• During cool-down, Process Heater and the

exhaust fan revert to 100% ventilation airflow

position (operating as if in paint mode)



FIGURE 105: WRP-4R

23.4.7 WRP- 5 Remote Control Station - 100% Ventilation Air / Reduced Airflow Cure System or 90/10 Recirculating Cure System

1. Description:


• System On & Off Push Buttons, Cure Push

Button & Heat Auto/On Switch.



• Eight System Indicating Lights.

• Cure Purge Timer, Digital Cure Timer & Cool-

Down timer.

• Maxitrol "M" Series temperature set point.


• Booth balancing pot for exhaust fan variable

frequency drive.




• System "ON" Push Button energizes system,

starting paint mode.

• Burner is activated through Heat Auto/On

Switch (In "On" Position: Burner energizes / In

"Auto" Position: Burner energizes through

outside air stat.).

• Ventilation air damper in 100% ventilation air

position.






booth pressure.

3.Cure Mode (100% outside air / reduced airflow

Cure system):

• Push Cure Button t o activate Cure Mode.


off.



mode).

• After purge cycle, Process Heater's discharge

damper re-positions to 50% airflow position,

exhaust fan operates at 50% airflow.

Temperature based on Cure temperature set

point.

• When Cure cycle is completed, cool-down

cycle is activated. Booth lights remain off.


and exhaust fan revert to 100% airflow position




4.Cure Mode (90/10 Recirculating Cure system):

• Push Cure Button to activate Cure Mode.


off.



mode).

• After purge cycle, Process Heater's dampers

re-position to 10% ventilation air & 90 % return

air for Cure cycle. Exhaust fan speed reduces

down to 10% airflow.

• Temperature based on Cure temperature set

point.

• When Cure cycle is completed, cool-down

cycle is activated. Booth lights remain off.

BOOTH PRESSURE

BURNER

BLOWER


OFF ON

LIGHTS

TEMP CONTROLLER

PGM

MAXITROL

ENT

20

5

3540

2530

45

50

55

60HOLD 0

15

10

DRY CYCLE START

PHOTOHELIC

1"

4

1"


121 of 198






FIGURE 106: WRP-5

SYSTEM OFF

CUTE ONCUTE

PURGE

PAINT

SYSTEM ONHEATING MODE

BOOTH LIGHT

BOOTH PRESSURE

OFF

AUTO ON HEAT ON

HEAT FAIL

CHANGE PIT FILTER

ON

COOL-DOWN

G

R

Y

B

A

Y

W

G A

R

R

TEMP CONTROLLER

PGM

MAXITROL

ENT

YOU CAN'T SEE IT!



INFORMATION OF NO


MAGNEHELIC

1"

0

1"I N C R E A S E

PAINT

DE C R E A S E I N C R E A S E

CURE

DE C R E A S E


122 of 198

SECTION 24: START-UP PROCEDURES

STOP!!!FAN BEARING LUBRICATION:Before initiating the following start-up procedures, confirm that the fan bearings are properly lubricated. See Section 25, Page 135. Failure to do so may VOID WARRANTY.










DANGER


Explosion Hazard

Leak test all compo-nents of equipment gas piping before operation.


Do not high pressure test gas piping with equipmentconnected.

Carbon MonoxideHazard



Falling Hazard



Burn Hazard



WARNING



123 of 198

Installation Code and Annual Inspections: All installation and service of WEATHER-RITE™

equipment must be performed by a contractor

qualified in the installation and service of equipment

sold and supplied by Weather-Rite LLC and conform

to all requirements set forth in the WEATHER-RITE™

manuals and all applicable governmental authorities

pertaining to the installation, service, operation and

labeling of the equipment.

To help facilitate optimum performance and safety,

Weather-Rite LLC recommends that a qualified

contractor conduct, at a minimum, annual

inspections of your WEATHER-RITE™ equipment

and perform service where necessary, using only

replacement parts sold and supplied by Weather-Rite

LLC.

Check installation site to ensure all codes and

engineering specifications are correct. This section of

the manual is intended to be used as an instructional

guide to the commissioning of the direct fired air

handler. Fill out the attached start up sheet (located

at the back of the manual) as each step of the

procedure is performed. This procedure should be

completed by the commissioning contractor and

returned to Weather-Rite LLC. If the document is not

returned, the manufacturing date will be used as the

warranty start date.

24.1 Installation of Recirculating Air Handler

Every direct-fired air handler which recirculates room

air (AM style) must utilize either a control system

which limits temperature rise in proportion to the

amount of outdoor air, or a room carbon dioxide

sensor, installed per the manufacturer's

recommendations. The normally closed contacts of

this sensor must be wired in as per the air handler's

wiring diagram, maintaining the room concentration

of CO2 below 5,000 ppm.

24.2 Mechanical

Refer to appliance rating plate for minimum outside

air requirements during recirculation operation.

Before installation, check that the local distribution

condition, nature of gas and pressure, and the

current state of adjustment of the appliance are

compatible.

If filters are not installed (via inlet hood or filter

section), an air strainer must be installed on the inlet

of the air handler with openings less than or equal to

5/8" (16 mm) in diameter.

Air inlets must be installed with the lowest edge 16"

(406.4 mm) above any surface. This applies to roof

curbs, upright stands and suspended air handlers.

24.2.1 Sheave Alignment

Sheaves are factory aligned. On all air handlers, check sheave alignment as follows:

1. A string to the vertical surface next to the

blower shaft bearing. (See Page 123, Figure 107)

2. Wrap the string around the blower sheave and

across both sheave surfaces as shown.

3. Adjust until all four contact points touch the

sheave surfaces. "IN" or "OUT" adjustment of

the motor sheave and/or motor adjustment

may be required.

4. Pull the string away from the motor sheave and

then move it slowly back towards the sheave,

making sure the string remains straight while

touching all contact points.

5. Remove string before turning air handler on.

NOTE: Allowances must be made for motor sheaves

which are wider than the blower sheaves.

FIGURE 107: Sheave Alignment

24.2.2 Belt Tension• Belt tension should be checked with a belt-tension

gauge when one is available. Follow the belt

tension gauge instructions.

• When a tension gauge is not available, measure

the belt span of the belts. (See Page 124, Figure 108.)

• Allow for 1/64" (.04 cm) of deflection for each inch

of center distance length for the charted pounds

of force. Check the table below for proper

deflection force.

• EXAMPLE: A 40" (101.6 cm) shaft center

distance would dictate 40"/64" or 5/8" (1.59

cm) of deflection. With a standard B-type

Correct Alignment

Incorrect Alignment


124 of 198

V-belt and a motor sheave measuring

between 5.8" (1.59 cm) and 8.6" (21.84 cm),

the belt will have proper tension if a 5/8"

deflection can be achieved with a minimum of

6-3/8 inch lbs. and a maximum of 8-3/4 inch

lbs. of pressure as measured with a belt

tensioning gauge.

FIGURE 108: Belt Tension

Table 40: Deflection Force of V-Belts (in lbs)

NOTE: If drive belts squeal during start-up, increase belt tension to the highest allowed value. Re-check tension during each inspection.

24.2.3 Air Temperature Sensing

The supply air sensing probe is either shipped loose

for field installation or factory mounted.

24.3 Electrical1. Check motor starter for proper overload set-

tings. The overload setting should match the

full load amps (FLA) + 10% of motor.

2. Verify correct blower.

3. Measure the supply voltage with the air handler

off and then on. For a system that is powered

with three phase power, measure the voltage of

each phase.

4. While the blower is running and the burner is

off, measure the total system current draw with

an ammeter. Measure the system current draw

again after the burner adjustments are made

and with the burner and blower both on.

5. If applicable, compare all variable frequency

drive (VFD) programming parameters with

specifications provided on electrical drawing.

24.4 Airflow

The air flow switches are factory calibrated safety

devices for burner air flow. If an air flow switch does

not close, the problem may not be the air flow switch.

It could be an indication of an air flow problem

(incorrect blower rotation, duct restrictions, etc.).

24.4.1 Differential Pressure

In order to verify proper airflow across the burner, the

differential pressure across the profile plate needs to

be measured. Attach a manometer to the pressure

test ports located inside of the control enclosure. See Page 124, Figure 109. Measure the differential

pressure with a manometer with the burner off and

the air handler running at full airflow. This reading

must be 0.55 +/- 0.1 in wc (1.37 +/- 0.25 mbar).

FIGURE 109: Differential Test Ports

Note: On the older model Air Handlers, these

pressure ports were located on either side of the

burner access panel for horizontal configuration or

above and below burner access panel on vertical

configuration.

Belt Cross-Section

Motor Sheave Dimension Range

(inches) - (cm)

TYPE BTYPE B-X (High H.P.)

Min. Max. Min. Max.

B

3.4 - 4.2 4 5 1/2 5 3/4 8

4.4 - 5.6 5 1/8 7 1/8 6 1/2 9 1/8

5.8 - 8.6 6 3/8 8 3/4 7 3/8 10 1/8

Belt Span


125 of 198

24.4.1.1 Differential Pressure Adjustment Manual Profiles

To adjust the differential pressure that was measured

in the step above, use the profile damper adjustment

quadrants located above and below the burner

access panel for horizontal configuration or on either

side of the burner access panel on vertical

configuration. To increase the differential pressure,

turn the quadrant towards the centerline of the

burner. To decrease the differential pressure, turn the

quadrants towards the parallel of airflow path. Both

quadrants must be at the same setting, but opposing,

for proper airflow distribution across the burner. Make

any adjustments in small increments and recheck

pressure drop after each adjustment. See Page 124, Figure 109.

FIGURE 110: Profile Quadrant Adjustment

24.4.1.2 Differential Pressure Adjustment Motor-ized Profiles

To adjust the differential pressure that was measured

on Page 124, Section 24.4.1 the profile blade

assemblies must be adjusted individually to achieve

the desired pressure. DO NOT disturb the

relationship of the damper motor to the shaft or any

linkage adjustments. Loosen the setscrew nearest

the linkage end of the profile blade and turn the blade

on the shaft in the direction necessary to correct the

pressure, make changes in small increments. Each

profile assembly is done individually and equally,

tighten setscrews securely when done. Turn the air

leaving edge of blade toward the burner to increase

pressure and away from burner to decrease

pressure. Check pressure over the full operating

range of the unit when done. See Page 124, Figure 109

FIGURE 111: Motorized Profile Adjustment

24.4.2 Burner Gas Flow (Temperature Rise)

The gas flow must be adjusted to give the design

temperature rise above outside air. Refer to the air

handler's rating plate for the temperature rise it was

ordered for. To determine the proper gas flow the

following steps need to be completed.

24.4.2.1 Burner Gas Flow - Maxitrol® Series 14/44 Temperature Control System

• Measure the outside air temperature.

• Disconnect one of the discharge sensor wires

from terminal 3 on the Maxitrol 1014 or 1044

amplifier. The air handler will now run at high fire.

• Start the air handler in the winter mode.

• After the burner has ignited and run for 30

seconds, measure the discharge temperature.

• Subtract the outside air temperature from the

discharge temperature; the difference is the

temperature rise.

• If the value is lower than required, increase the

gas flow. If the value is higher than required,

decrease the gas flow. For adjustments See Page 127, Section 24.5.


126 of 198

NOTE: Open the burner observation port and

examine the burner flame. The flame should be a

brilliant blue with short (approx. 1" to 2") yellow

finger tips. If there is too much yellow in the flame

then the air pressure drop, or velocity across the

burner, needs to be increased. This is

accomplished by closing the profile blades. If

there is hardly any yellow in the flame or the

burner sounds like a blowtorch, then you would

decrease the air pressure drop across the burner

by opening the profile blades. This can also be

checked by using a pressure gauge across the

burner and measuring the pressure drop. The

pressure reading should be 0.55 +/- 0.1 In W.C.

(1.37 +/- 0.25 mbar). Performance of the burner

must always be verified by a visual observation.

• Shut the air handler off.

• Locate terminal #1 on the amplifier. Disconnect

the wire that is on that terminal.

• Turn the air handler on in the winter mode. The

unit will now stay in low fire. Low fire should be 1"-

1-1/2" deep and run full length across the burner

(no gaps), if the flame is too high then turn low fire

down. If the flame does not cover the entire length

of the burner then increase the low fire. Observe

the flame; its appearance will be the same as high

fire except for the flame length. For adjustments

See See Page 127, Section 24.5.

• Shut the air handler down.

• Reconnect the wires back to terminals #1 & #3 on

the amplifier.

• Turn the equipment back on in the winter mode.

Vary the temperature selector between the lowest

setting and the highest setting. Visually check the

burner during this operation. The appearance of

the flame will remain the same, brilliant blue with

short yellow finger tips.

24.4.2.2 Burner Gas Flow - Maxitrol® Series 94 and MP2 Temperature Control System

• Measure the outside air temperature.

• Locate the wires connected to terminals (Series

94-#10 & 12, Series MP-#SP1 & SP2) on the

amplifier. Swap their location on the amplifier.

• Start the air handler in the winter mode.

• Set the dry temperature (Series 94) or the second

stage temperature setting (Series MP) to at least

100° over the ambient temperature.

• After the burner has ignited and run for 30

seconds, measure the discharge temperature.

• Subtract the outside air temperature from the

discharge temperature; the difference is the

temperature rise.

• If the value is lower than required, increase the

gas flow. If the value is higher than required,

decrease the gas flow. For adjustments See Page 127, Section 24.5.

NOTE: Open the burner observation port and

examine the burner flame. The flame should be a

brilliant blue with short (approx. 1" 2") yellow

finger tips. If there is too much yellow in the flame

then the air pressure drop, or velocity across the

burner, needs to be increased. This is

accomplished by closing the profile blades. If

there is hardly any yellow in the flame or the

burner sounds like a blowtorch, then you would

decrease the air pressure drop across the burner

by opening the profile blades. This can also be

checked by using a pressure gauge across the

burner and measuring the pressure drop. The

pressure reading should be 0.55 +/- 0.1 In W.C.

(1.37 +/- 0.25 mbar). Performance of the burner

must always be verified by a visual observation.

• Shut the air handler off.

• Go to the amplifier and locate terminal #1.

Disconnect the wire that is on that terminal.

• Turn the air handler on in the winter mode. The

unit will now stay in low fire.

• Low fire should be 1-1 1/2" deep and run full

length across the burner (no gaps). If the flame is

too high then turn low fire down. If the flame does

not cover the entire length of the burner then

increase the low fire. Observe the flame; its

appearance will be the same as high fire except

for the flame length. For proper adjustments see

See Page 127, Section 24.5.

• Shut the air handler down.

• Reconnect the wire back to terminal #1 on the

amplifier.

• Turn the equipment back on in the winter mode.

Vary the spray temperature selector (Series 94) or

first stage temperature setting (Series MP)

between the lowest setting and the highest

setting. Visually check the burner during this

operation. The appearance of the flame will

remain the same, brilliant blue with short yellow


127 of 198

finger tips.

24.5 Gas Piping and Initial Pressure Settings1. Perform a pressure test on all gas supply lines

to the air handler per applicable codes.

Make sure to isolate all gas controls before pressure testing the system.

2. Verify supply pressure does not exceed maxi-

mum rated gas pressure as stated on the rating

plate.

3. Set the supply gas pressure at the step down

regulator (normally outside of the enclosure if

one is installed) according to the name plate

rating inlet gas pressure specifications.

4. Only after performing steps 1-3 above, verify

pilot pressure.

• Place a u-tube manometer or gas pressure

gauge on the tee at the downstream side of

the pilot pressure regulator. See Page 128, Section 112.

• Open the main gas valve and close the gas

valve downstream of the MR valve.

• Start the air handler in the winter mode and

adjust the pilot pressure regulator to 3.5 in

W.C. for natural gas or 9 to 11 in W.C. for LPG.

• Verify that the burner flame control has a

flame signal of 5.0 to 10VDC.

5. Adjust air handler high fire gas pressure.

• Force the burner into high fire. See Page 140, Table 42 or See Page 125, Section 24.4.2.1

through Page 126, Section 24.4.2.2. for the

specific amplifier and action required to place

it into high fire mode.

• Open both manual gas valves at the air

handler.

• Begin by removing high fire adjustment cap,

see Page 129, Figure 113, and rotating the

regulator adjustment screw. A clockwise

rotation increases manifold pressure.

• For air handlers equipped with less than 1

MBH gas trains, the high fire gas pressure is

set by adjusting the regulator upstream of the

M611 valve. See Page 131, Figure 115.

• Reconnect any wires that were used for

adjustment.

6. Low Fire Adjustment

• NOTE: High fire gas pressure must be set

BEFORE adjusting low fire. There are three

critical items to consider before adjusting low

fire:

A. Low fire adjustment does not regulate gas

pressure.

B. If the low fire adjustment screw is set to

maximum, high fire regulation problems will

occur.

C. The burner control system must be forced

into low fire. See Page 151, Table 42 or See

Page 136, Section 24.4.2.1 through Page 137,

Section 24.4.2.2. for the specific amplifier and

action required to place it into low fire mode.

• Low fire is set at the MR212 valve using the

adjustment screw under the low fire.

Adjustment cap screw (loosen locking screw

before adjustment), see Page 129, Figure 113

or on the M611 valve using the brass adjusting

screw on the front side, see Page 128, Figure 112. Rotate the adjustment screw until there is

a continuous blue ribbon across the entire

burner. A counter clockwise rotation increases

the flame size. Low fire temperature rise must

not exceed 12 °F (7 °C). Tighten locking screw

when finished.

• Reconnect any wires that were removed for

adjustment.

7. Once gas pressure and high/low fire adjust-

ments are made, the gas setup is completed.

All taps and instruments must be removed

and all caps and plugs must be replaced.


128 of 198

FIGURE 112: Pilot Pressure Tap




PILOT PRESSURE TAP.



129 of 198

FIGURE 113: Maxitrol MR212 Valve

T N E V

R

2A04

112

A06

R

Low Fire Adjustment

(loosen locking screw

before adjustment)

High Fire Adjustment


130 of 198

FIGURE 114: Regulator RV61


131 of 198

FIGURE 115: Maxitrol M611 Valve

24.6 Safety Shut Off Valve Check

After the initial start up and gas pressure adjustment,

verify gas soundness of each SSOV (Safety Shut Off

Valve). This check must be repeated after the first

100 hours of operation.

24.7 Air Volume Control24.7.1 Volumatic Dampers

• Air handler can be running in either the summer

or winter mode of operation.

• Set the damper position controller to highest

airflow requirement. Discharge dampers will drive

to full open position.

• Pressure drop across burner should remain stable

during all settings of the damper position

controller.

• Set the damper position controller for lowest

airflow position (discharge damper will drive to its

minimum position) and take air pressure drop

readings across burner profiles.

• If below recommended setting, decrease the

profile linkage range of travel without altering the

full airflow position. If above setting, increase the

profile linkage range. See Page 125, Section 24.4.2.1.

• Recheck air pressure drops across burner on high

and low airflow settings.

• Minimum air damper position controller is factory

set and should not be adjusted unless specifically

directed to do so by the factory.

24.7.2 Volumatic Variable Frequency Drive• Air handler can be running in either the summer


• Set the VFD to highest airflow requirement.



controller.

• Set the VFD for lowest airflow position and take

air pressure drop readings across burner profiles.





Low Fire Adjustment

(under cap)

Gas Inlet

Gas Outlet


132 of 198



• Minimum motor speed is factory set and should

not be adjusted unless specifically directed to do

so by the factory.

24.7.3 Two Position Volumatic• Air handler can be running in either the summer


• Close interlock for high airflow. Discharge

dampers will drive to full open position.

• Pressure drop across burner should remain

stable.

• Open interlock for high airflow, discharge damper

will drive to its minimum position determined by

the air handler mounted damper position

controller. This controller determines what the

airflow will be delivered; it must be set so air

handler does not go below the minimum setting

for the burner air pressure drop.

• Take air pressure drop reading across burner

profiles.







• The air handler is supplied with a reduced

maximum fire potentiometer which prevents the

burner from over firing while in its reduced airflow

operation. Adjusting this potentiometer controls

the burner efficiency and performance at low

airflow. Turning this potentiometer counter

clockwise increases burner output clockwise

decreases the output. Set this potentiometer to

meet the design temperature rise at the low

airflow setting. See Page 125, Section 24.4.2.1.

24.7.4 Two Speed Volumatic• Air handler can be running in either the summer


• Close interlock for high speed.

• Pressure drop across burner should remain

stable.

• Open interlock for high speed.

• Take air pressure drop across burner profiles.



high speed position. If above setting, increase the



and low speed settings.

• The air handler is supplied with a reduced

maximum fire potentiometer which prevents the

burner from over firing while in its low speed

operation. Adjusting this potentiometer controls

the burner efficiency and performance at low

airflow. Turning this potentiometer counter

clockwise increases burner output clockwise

decreases the output. Set this potentiometer to

meet the design temperature rise at the low speed

setting. See Page 125, Section 24.4.2.

24.7.5 Volumatic/Recirculating• Air handler can be running in either the summer


• Set the damper position controller to highest

outside airflow requirement. Inlet dampers (if

equipped) will drive to full open position, return air

dampers will drive to the full closed position.



controller.

• Set the damper position controller for lowest

outside airflow position. Inlet damper (if equipped)

will drive to its minimum position, return air

dampers will drive to the full open position and

verify the air pressure drop across burner profiles.






and low outside airflow settings.

• Minimum air damper position controller is factory

set and should not be adjusted unless specifically

directed to do so by the factory.

SECTION 25: MAINTENANCE

133 of 198


Prior to any maintenance or service to the air handler, shut off, lockout and tagout the electrical disconnect

and fuel valve that supplies the unit in accordance with OSHA regulations and allow ample time for the air

handler to cool. After maintenance is performed or unit is serviced, the unit shall be re-commissioned to the

start-up procedure as outlined on Page 122, Section 24.

DANGER












134 of 198

Installation Code and Annual Inspections: All installation and service of WEATHER-RITE™

equipment must be performed by a contractor

qualified in the installation and service of equipment

sold and supplied by Weather-Rite LLC and conform

to all requirements set forth in the WEATHER-RITE™

manuals and all applicable governmental authorities

pertaining to the installation, service, operation and

labeling of the equipment.

To help facilitate optimum performance and safety,

Weather-Rite LLC recommends that a qualified

contractor conduct, at a minimum, annual

inspections of your WEATHER-RITE™ equipment

and perform service where necessary, using only

replacement parts sold and supplied by Weather-Rite

LLC.

25.1 General

25.2 Unit Exterior

First 8 Hours of Operation Check belts and adjust as required (See Page 123, Section 24.2.2). Though

belts were properly adjusted at the factory, they will stretch after the first few

hours of operation.

First 100 Hours of Operation

Re-check belt tension and adjust if necessary.

Annual Fall Start-Up Follow entire start-up procedure at this time and check control settings and

operation.

Cabinet Exterior After installation, touch up scratches. Periodic painting should be done there-

after as required. The caulk around weather enclosures and over field joints

should be inspected annually. Re-apply caulk as needed to maintain integrity.

Warning labels and logo labels should be legible and accurate. Please con-

tact Weather-Rite LLC or WEATHER-RITE™ independent distributor if you

need replacement warning labels or logo labels.

See Page 2, Figure 1.5 through Page 3, Section 3.

Unit Location Verify that no flammable objects, liquids or vapors are present near the air

handler.

Do not hang anything from or place anything on the air handler.

Keep the area under and around the air handler free of all objects.

See Page 10, Section 3 for Clearances to Combustibles.


135 of 198

25.3 Blower SectionBlower Wheel Inspect blower wheel and clean as necessary. A small build up of dust can

cause a significant decrease in blower performance. Check for excessive

vibration, repair as required. Critical labels are located on or near the blower

housing. Contact Weather-Rite LLC or WEATHER-RITE™ independent distrib-

utor if you need replacement labels. See Page 3, Figure 3.

Drive Belts and Sheaves Check for belt ride in the groove. In multiple groove drives, belt ride should be

uniform. Check groove wear area for wear. Side wall of groove should be

straight, not dished out. Bottom of groove should show no signs of belt con-

tact.

Sheave alignment, set screw torque and belt tension should be checked after

8, 24, and 100 hours of operation after initial start-up. Visually inspect belts

and sheaves for excessive wear. If belts have a slick, glazed look, the belts

are slipping. Check drive capacity and belt tension.

Never replace only one belt in a used set, as used belts will elongate.

Replace the entire set if replacement is necessary.

See Page 134, Section 25.2 and Page 123, Section 24.2.2.

Blower Bearing Lubrication

The blowers use pillow block and flange bearings; they should be re-lubri-

cated based on lubrication chart. The recommended lubricant is Shell Alvania

#2 or S3 grease. To re-lubricate the blower flange/pillow block bearings, be

sure that the grease fittings on the bearing housing (or air handler cabinet wall

in the case of extended grease lines) are clean. Apply the recommended

grease to the fitting with a low-pressure grease gun and add slowly while the

shaft is spun by hand. Do not over-grease. Over-greasing will reduce the ser-

vice life of the bearings. Consult the blower manufacturer for grease capacity

recommendations as capacities vary by model.


136 of 198

Motors Inspection:1. Inspect motor every 3 months or 500 hours of operation, which ever

occurs first. Keep the motor clean and vent openings clear.

Lubrication:1. Motors with grease fittings must be lubricated based on the table below.

2. A high grade ball or roller bearing grease must be used. Recommended

grease for standard service is Mobil Polyrex™ EM (Exxon Mobil). Other

compatible greases include ChevronTexaco Polystar®, ChevronTexaco

Rykon® Premium 2, Pennzoil® Pen 2 and ChevronTexaco SRI.

3. Motors without grease fittings are sealed for life and do not require re-

lubrication.

Instructions for LubricatingBefore greasing, be sure fittings are clean and free from dirt. Remove grease relief plug or plate and, using a low-pressure grease gun, pump in the required grease. Do not over-grease. Relubrication intervals are specified in the table above. After relubricating, allow motor to run for 10 minutes before replacing relief hardware.

NOTE: In general it is not recommended to mix greases of different brands. The mixing of different types of thickeners may destroy the composition and physical properties of the grease. In the event that a different grease is required by the end user, the following steps can be taken. Using the instruc-tions for lubrication, open grease outlet and purge the system as much as possible of the old or unwanted grease. Repeat this same operation after 1 week of service. Consult Weather-Rite LLC or the motor manufacturer for fur-ther recommendations on grease compatibility.

Table 41: Motor Lubrication Intervals

Note: These intervals are based on severe duty. Over lubricating bearings could result in reduced motor life.

NEMA Frame Size (Motor HP) Rated at 1800 RPM (Hrs)

Up to 210 (3 - 5 HP) 6,000

Over 210 to 280 (7.5 - 20 HP) 4,750

Over 280 to 360 (25 - 50 HP) 3,700


137 of 198

25.4 Motor and Drive Components

FIGURE 116: Supply Blowers

Gain access to the blower and motor by removing the belt guard or weather-proof cover. First, release tension on the belts by adjusting the motor base closer to the blower pulley. Remove the belts.

To remove the motor pulley, first loosen the adjustment set screws and count the number of turns to fully close the pulley (this number will be required to reinstall the pulleys to the previous adjustment). Open the adjustable sheaves to gain access to the shaft set screws. Loosen the set screw(s) that hold it to the motor shaft and pull away from the motor.

To remove the blower pulley, remove the bolts from the bushing and insert into the previously unused threaded holes of the bushing. Carefully press the blower pulley off the bushing, tightening the bolts evenly. Loosen the Allen Head setscrew (located on top of the keyway) and slide the pulley bushing off the shaft.

To remove the motor, first remove any guards and/or covers around motor and then remove motor pulley as described above. Disconnect the motor power wiring and conduit at the junction box in the side of the motor. Support the motor so that it will be secure when disconnected from the adjustable base. Remove the bolts that hold the motor to the adjustable base. The motor may now be removed.

CUTOFF

SCROLL

SHAFT

WHEEL

DRIVEN PULLEY BUSHING

MOTOR

BELT

DRIVE PULLEY

FLANGE BEARING

FLANGE BEARING

~

~

~


138 of 198

25.5 Supply Blower

25.6 Manifold and Controls

The supply air is handled by DWDI (double width, double inlet) blower wheel(s) mounted on either a solid or tubular shaft. The blower wheel(s) are attached to this shaft via two setscrews or two clamps (tubular shaft style) (one on each side of the wheel). The clamp style is secured in placed by two 3/8 socket head screws. These screws should be checked on startup for tight-ness. If loose, they will need to be equally tighten.

Two styles of bearings are used on the air handlers. The driven end (motor side) bearings are a flange block style. The bearing on the side opposite the motor is also a flange style on TT112 - TT221, on TT224 - TT236 this is a pil-low block style. All of the bearings are equipped with eccentric locking collars. These bearings should be checked for tightness before startup. To re tighten if necessary, you must rotate the collar in the direction the shaft turns. Loosen the setscrew that locks the collar to the shaft. Use a punch with a hammer to give the collar a hard strike to set the collar then tighten the setscrew down again.

Below find label for proper bearing load lubrication guidelines. Label can also be found on the unit, please refer to section 1.5 for label location.

Manifold Periodically check fuel control assembly, and internal and external piping for leaks. Relief vent lines to outdoors on fuel controls should be checked to ensure against blockage caused by insects or any other substance. Clean as required.

All gas piping to the air handler must comply with the National Fuel Gas Code - NFPA54, latest edition and all local codes. Verify gas soundness of each SSOV (Safety Shut Off Valve). This test must be repeated after the first 100 hours of operation.

See Page 78, Figure 62 through Page 81, Figure 68.

Air Flow Switch An annual check of the tubes attached to the air flow switch should be made to ensure against blockage caused by insects or any other substance. Clean as required.

See Page 124, Section 24.4.

Electric Components Check to see there is no physical damage on any of the electric components

and verify all electrical connections are secure. Ensure equipment is properly

grounded.

See Page 124, Section 24.3 and Page 151, Section 26.6.

Temperature Sensors Calibrate space, outdoor air, and discharge air sensors as required.


139 of 198

25.7 BurnerAn annual inspection of the burner and components must be made to ensure proper and safe operation. For the most part, the burner is self cleaning. However, if the application is extremely dirty or dusty, it may become neces-sary to periodically clean the burner. Inspect and clean the burner in accor-dance with the following recommended procedures:

First clean the burner plates. Then, clear the burner gas and air parts. Insure the spark good is in good condition. Lastly, insure the flame sensor is in good condition.

1. To avoid damaging the valves, disconnect the burner piping from the

manifold, at the union inside the air handler's casing, and cover the

exposed end of the manifold. See Page 78, Figure 62 through Page 81, Figure 68.

2. Disconnect the pilot gas line.

3. Remove the ignition cable from the igniter on the side of the burner, and

then remove the flame rod conductor wire along with the ground wire, if

so equipped, unscrew the UV scanner from the side of the burner

4. Remove the pilot assembly which is attached to the end of the burner

with four machine screws and nuts.

5. Remove the end caps off both ends of the burner and clean off the old

furnace cement both from the end caps and the burner.

6. To clean the burner plates you'll need a stiff wire brush. Scrub both

sides of the stainless steel burner plates to remove any soot or other

build up, which may be on the burner. All of the burner plate holes must

be clear so air can pass through them unrestricted. The holes in the

burner plate allow air to mix with the gas in increasing amounts, as the

flame gets longer.

7. After you've cleaned the burner plates, inspect them for cracking.

Cracks occurring between one or two holes are normal and should be

of no concern. If the cracking is more extensive, the affected plates

should be replaced.

8. While you have the brush in your hand, scrub the rust, soot and other

foreign material from the burner orifice area.

9. Clean the burner gas and air ports using a drill bit or piece of wire of the

appropriate size. See Page 140, Table 42 for drill size. Use a pin vise

with the appropriate drill, to clean debris from the orifices. An electric

drill is not suggested because it is easy to snap drill bits off in the ori-

fices.

10. After the orifices are drilled to the correct size and using compressed air

or a vacuum, remove any debris from the manifold. Debris left in the

manifold will prematurely clog the orifices in the future.

11. Reinstall the end caps to both ends of the burner using new furnace

cement as a gasket material. You should now inspect the spark rod.

The tip should be clean and free of dirt and carbon. The porcelain must

be intact. If it's cracked, replace it. While you have the spark rod out you

should pull the flame rod or ultraviolet scanner as well.


140 of 198

Table 42: Burner Orifice Sizes

12. If your flame sensor is a scanner, clean the lens with a clean damp soft

rag. A flame rod's metal rod should be clean and free of dirt and carbon.

Like the spark rod igniter, the porcelain on the flame rod must be intact

as well. Replace it if it's cracked. Reinstall the spark rod to the proper

setting See Page 110, Figure . Reinstall the flame sensor; if it is a flame

rod ensure the correct positioning see Page 111, Figure 93.

13. Reinstall the pilot assembly and connect appropriate cables and con-

ductors and pilot gas line.

Model Fuel Gas Port Drill Size Air Port Drill SizeHMA-2A Natural Gas/Propane 1/8" 42

Dampers Check linkage when applicable and tighten set screws as required. All moving parts of dampers should be cleaned and then thoroughly lubricated with light molybdenum oil in aerosol can.

Dampers furnished with stainless steel side seals should also have the seals lubricated generously. Dampers should then be manually operated several times until linkages and blades operate freely.

Reconnect linkages and check dampers for proper operation.

See Page 70, Section 15.

Filters Filters should be checked for dirt restriction on a monthly basis (or as required).

Replace filters with filters of equal specification when they appear dirty.

See Page 57, Section 12 for filter section filters. See Page 60, Section 13 for inlet hood filters.

Evaporative / Cooling If applicable, refer to separate maintenance literature.

SECTION 26: REPLACEMENT PARTS

141 of 198


See warnings and important information before removing or replacing parts. After any maintenance or repair

work, always test fire the heater in accordance with the start-up instructions on Page 122, Section 24 to help

ensure all safety systems are in working order before leaving the heater to operate. Minor faults may be

traced by using the troubleshooting charts on Page 156, Section 27.

Replacement parts list is for general direct fired applications and MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE FOR your

specific unit configuration. Before ordering replacement parts, please contact factory to make sure that the

replacement parts are the direct replacement for your specific unit.

26.1 Replacement Blower Components26.1.1 Blower Parts


WARNING

Use only genuine WEATHER-RITE™ replacement parts per this installation, operation and service manual.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, electric shock, injury or property damage.

Explosion Hazard

DANGER

Electrical Shock Hazard Fire Hazard

Model Description Part Number Quantity

TT112

BEARING 81900060 2

SHAFT 77017001 1

WHEEL 82000000 1

TT115

BEARING 81900060 2

SHAFT 77017001 1

WHEEL 82000010 1

TT118

BEARING 81900070 2

SHAFT 33163300 1

WHEEL 82000020 1

TT212

BEARING 81900060 1

BEARING END DRIVE 81900000 1

SHAFT 76025000 1

WHEEL 82000000 2

TT215

BEARING 81900060 1

BEARING DRIVE END 81900090 1

SHAFT 30315503 1

WHEEL 10807701 2

TT218

BEARING 81900060 1


SHAFT 30315503 1

WHEEL 10807702 2

TT221

BEARING 81900060 1


SHAFT 30315401 1

WHEEL 10807707 2

TT224

BEARING 81900060 1


SHAFT 30315401 1

WHEEL 10807704 2

TT230

BEARING 81900000 1


SHAFT 30315700 1

WHEEL 10807705 2


142 of 198

26.1.2 Bushing, Fixed Pulley

Model Description Part Number Quantity

TT233

BEARING 81900000 1


SHAFT 30315702 1

WHEEL 82000073 2

TT236

BEARING 81900000 1


SHAFT 30315900 1

WHEEL 82000083 2

Description Size (in) Part NumberSD 7/8 82200580

SD 1 3/16 14153100

SD 1 7/16 82200590

SD 1 1/2 82200595

SD 1 5/8 82200610

SD 1 15/16 14142800

SD158 1 5/8 82200600

SD178 1 7/8 82200620

SDS 1 1/4 82200470

SDS11116 1 11/16 82200520

SDS112 1 1/2 82200550

SDS11516 1 15/16 82200540

SDS1316 13/16 82200480

SDS138 1 3/8 82200490

SDS158 1 5/8 82200510

SDS1716 1 7/16 82200500

SF 1.438 1 7/16 14130500

SF 1.688 1 11/16 14263800

SF 2.938 2 15/16 82200900

SF11116 1 11/16 82200830

SF11516 1 15/16 82200840

SF158 1 5/8 82200850

SF21116 2 11/16 14173900

SF218 2 1/8 82201000

SF2316 2 3/16 82200860

SF238 2 3/8 14071000

SF2716 2 7/16 82200870

SF278 2 7/8 82200880

SH .75 3/4 14220000

SH 1.188 1 3/16 82200420

SH 1.688 1 11/16 82210700

SH138 1 3/8 82200430

SH158 1 5/8 82200450

SH1716 1 7/16 82200440

SK 1.375 1 3/8 82200670

SK 2.188 2 3/16 82200740

SK 2.438 2 7/16 82200750

SK 2.688 2 11/16 82200760

SK11116 1 11/16 82200700

SK112 1 1/2 82201030

SK11516 1 15/16 82200720

SK118 1 1/8 82201020

SK1316 1 3/16 82200660

SK158 1 5/8 82200690

SK1716 1 7/16 82200680

SK178 1 7/8 82200710

SK218 2 1/8 82200730

SK238 2 3/8 82201010


143 of 198

26.1.3 Fixed PulleyDescription Part Number

1B X 11.0 1-3/16 82105120

1B X 11.0 PD SDS 14093210

1B X 12.4 1-3/16 82105140

1B X 12.4 PD SDS 14189300

1B X 13.6 1-3/16 82105150

1B X 13.6 PD SDS 82105160

1B X 16.0 PD SDS 82100270

1B X 18.4 PD SK 82100280

1B X 20.0 PD SK 82100290

1B x 3.4 PD 1-3/16 14129000

1B X 3.6 PD SH 14228902

1B X 4.0 PD 1-3/16 14106400

1B X 4.2 PD SH 14228903

1B X 4.6 PD 1-3/16 14118900

1B X 40 SH 14087110

1B X 5.0 PD 5/8 14087100

1B X 5.2 PD SDS 14110800

1B X 5.6 1.18 14120400

1B X 5.8 1-3/16 82100110

1B X 6.0 SDS 14120410

1B X 6.2 PD SDS 14228904

1B X 6.8 1-3/16 82105060

1B X 7.4 1-3/16 82105070

1B X 7.4 PD SDS 82100180

1B X 8.6 1-3/16 82105080

1B X 9.4 PD SDS 82100220

2B X 11.0 PD SK 82100560

2B X 12.4 PD SK 82100570

2B X 13.6 PD SK 82100580

2B X 15.4 PD SK 82100590

2B X 16.0 PD SK 82100600

2B X 18.4 PD SK 82100610

2B X 20.0 PD SF 82100620

2B X 23.0 2.125 14143000

2B X 25.0 SF 82100630

2B X 3.4 PD SH 14228901

2B X 4.2 PD SH 82100360

2B X 4.4 PD SH 82100370

2B X 4.6 PD SDS 82100380

2B X 4.8 PD SDS 82100390

2B X 5.2 PD SDS 82100410

2B X 5.4 PD SDS 82100420

2B X 5.6 PD SDS 82100430

2B X 5.8 PD SDS 82100440

2B X 6.0 PD SDS 82100450

2B X 6.2 PD SDS 82100460

2B X 6.4 PD SDS 82100470

2B X 6.6 PD SDS 82100480

2B X 6.8 PD SDS 82100490

2B X 7.0 PD SK 82100500

2B X 7.4 PD SK 82100510

2B X 8.0 PD SK 82100520

2B X 8.6 PD SK 82100530

2B X 9.4 PD SK 82100550

3B X 5.2 PD SD 82100740

3B X 11.0 PD SK 82100890

3B X 12.4 PD SK 82100900

3B X 13.6 PD SK 82100910

3B X 15.4 PD SK 82100920

3B X 16.0 PD SK 82100930

3B X 18.4 PD SK 82100940


144 of 198

26.1.4 Variable Pulley

Description Part Number3B X 20.0 PD SF 82100950

3B X 25.0 PD SF 82100960

3B X 30.0 PD SF 82100970

3B X 31.5 PD SH 14120900

3B X 4.4 PD SD 82100700

3B X 4.6 PD SD 82100710

3B X 4.8 PD SD 82100720

3B X 5.0 PD SD 82100730

3B X 5.4 PD SD 82100750

3B X 5.6 PD SD 82100760

3B X 5.8 PD SD 82100770

3B X 6.0 PD SD 82100780

3B X 6.2 PD SD 82100790

3B X 6.4 PD SD 82100800

3B X 6.6 PD SD 82100810

3B X 6.8 PD SD 82100820

3B X 7.0 PD SK 82100830

3B X 7.0 PD SF 14209910

3B X 7.4 PD SK 82100840

3B X 8.0 PD SD 82100750

3B X 8.0 PD SF 14225100

3B X 8.6 PD SK 82100860

3B X 9.4 PD SK 82100880

4B X 11.0 PD SK 82101220

4B X 12.4 PD SK 82101230

4B X 13.6 PD SK 82101240

4B X 15.4 PD SF 82101250

4B X 16.0 PD SF 82101260

4B X 18.4 PD SF 82101270

4B X 20.0 PD SF 82101280

4B X 25.0 PD 82101290

4B X 30.0 PD 82101300

4B X 38.0 PD 82101310

4B X 5.2 PD SD 14100400

4B X 5.6 PD SD 14188400

4B X 5.8 PD SD 82101100

4B X 6.0 PD SD 82101110

4B X 6.2 PD SD 82101120

4B X 6.4 PD SD 82101130

4B X 6.6 PD SD 82101140

4B X 6.8 PD SD 82101150

4B X 7.0 PD SK 82101160

4B X 7.4 PD SK 82101170

4B X 8.0 PD SK 82101180

4B X 8.6 PD SK 82101190

4B X 9.4 PD SK 82101210

Description Part Number1B X 3.1 -4.1 1-1/8" 82105560

1B X 3.1-4. 1 7/8" 82105550

1B x 3.7-4.7 1-1/8" 82105580

1B x 4.3-5.3 1-7/8" 82101560

1B x 4.3-5.3 5/8" 82101540

1B x 4.3-5.3 7/8" 82101550

1B x 4.6-5.6 7/8" 82101650

1B x 4.9-5.9 1-1/8" 82101620

1B x 4.9-5.9 1-1/8" 82105610

1B x 4.9-5.9 1-3/8" 82105610

1B x 4.9-5.9 5/8" 82107620

1B x 4.9-5.9 7/8" 82101610


145 of 198

Description Part Number1B x 5.0-6.5 1-3/8" 82105930

1B x 6.0-7.4 1-1/8" 82101630

1B X 6.3-7.3 1-1/8" 14128900

2B X 3.5-4.9 1-3/8" 82101810

2B X 3.5-4.9 7/8" 82101790

2B X 4.3-5.3 1-3/8" 82101890

2B X 4.3-5.4 1-3/8 14228905

2B X 4.5-5.9 1-5/8" 82101930

2B X 4.5-5.9 1- 1/8 82101910

2B X 4.5-5.9 1-3/8" 82101920

2B X 4.5-6.3 1-1/8" 82101950

2B X 4.9-5.9 1-3/8" 82101960

2B X 4.9-5.9 1-5/8" 82101970

2B X 4.9-5.9 7/8" 82101940

2B X 4.9-6.3 1" 14105900

2B X 5.0-6.4 1-1/8" 82102170

2B X 5.0-6.4 1-3/8 82102180

2B X 5.5-6.6 1-3/8 82102120

2B X 5.5-6.6 1-5/8 82102130

2B X 5.5-6.9 1-5/8 82102670

2B X 5.6-6.6 1-3/8 82105850

2B X 5.8-6.9 1-1/8 82102210

2B X 6.0-7.4 1-1/8 82102010

2B X 6.0-7.4 1-3/8 82102190

2B X 6.0-7.4 1-5/8 82102200

2B X 7.0-8.4 1-3/8 14154300

2B X 8.0-9.4 1-3/8 82102230

2B X 8.0-9.4 1-5/8 82102240

2B X5.0-6.4 1-5/8 82102030

3B X 4.0-5.4 1-5/8 82102290

3B X 4.5-5.9 1-3/8 82102310

3B X 4.5-5.9 1-5/8 82102320

3B X 4.5-5.9 1-7/8 82102321

3B X 4.9-5.9 1-1/8 82102300

3B X 5.0-6.4 1-5/8 82102350

3B X 5.5-6.9 1-3/8 14153800

3B X 5.5-6.9 1-5/8 82102390

3B X 5.5-6.9 1-7/8 82102400

3B X 6.0-7.4 1-5/8 14228917

3B X 6.0-7.4 1-7/8 82102420

3B X 6.0-7.4 2-2/16 82102510

3B X 7.0-8.4 1-5/8 82102450

3B X 7.0-8.4 1-7/8 14122800

3B X 8.07-9.44 14120800

3B X 8.0-9.4 1-7/8 82102500

4B X 4.5-5.9 1-5/8 14228912

4B X 4.5-5.9 1-7/8 82102610

4B X 5.0-6.4 1-5/8 82102640

4B X 5.5-6.9 1-7/8 82102680

4B X 6.0-7.4 1-5/8 82102701

4B X 6.0-7.4 1-7/8 82102700

4B X 6.0-7.4 2-1/8 82102710

4B X 7.0-8.4 1-7/8 14125200

4B X 7.0-8.4 2-1/8 82102750

4B X 8.0-9.4 2-1/8 82102790

4B X 8.0-9.4 2-3/8 14124700

4B X 8.9-9.4 1-7/8 14228913


146 of 198

26.1.5 BeltsDescription Part Number

B-036 33689436

B-040 33689440

B-041 33689441

B-042 33689402

B-043 33689443

B-044 33689444

B-045 33689445

B-046 33689446

B-047 33689447

B-048 33689448

B-050 33689450

B-052 33689452

B-053 33689453

B-054 33689454

B-057 33689457

B-058 33689458

B-060 33689460

B-062 33689462

B-063 33689463

B-064 33689464

B-065 33689465

B-066 33689466

B-067 33689467

B-068 33689468

B-069 33689469

B-070 33689470

B-071 33689471

B-072 33689472

B-073 33689473

B-074 33689474

B-075 33689475

B-076 33689476

B-077 33689477

B-078 33689478

B-079 33689479

B-080 33689480

B-081 33689481

B-082 33689482

B-083 33689483

B-084 33689484

B-085 33689485

B-086 33689486

B-088 33689488

B-089 33689489

B-090 33689490

B-091 33689491

B-092 33689492

B-093 33689493

B-094 33689494

B-095 33689495

B-096 33689496

B-097 33689497

B-099 33689499

B-100 33689400

B-101 33689401

B-103 33689403

B-104 33689404

B-105 33689405

B-108 33689408

B-112 33689412

B-115 33689415


147 of 198

26.2 Damper Components26.2.1 Actuators

Description Part NumberB-120 33689420

B-128 33689428

B-150 33689411

B-154 33689413

BX-49 33689549

BX-50 33689550

BX-51 33689551

BX-52 33689552

BX-62 33689562

BX-64 33689564

BX-65 33689565

BX-67 33689567

BX-70 33689570

BX-72 33689572

BX-76 33689576

BX-77 33689577

BX-78 33689578

BX-80 33689580

BX-81 33689581

BX-82 33689582

BX-83 33689583

BX-84 33689584

BX-85 33689585

BX-86 33689586

BX-87 33689587

BX-88 33689588

BX-90 33689590

BX-93 33689593

BX-95 33689595

BX-96 33689596

BX-97 33689597

BX-98 33689598

BX-99 33689599

BX-100 33689500

BX-103 33689501

BX-105 33689505

BX-108 33689508

BX-113 33689513

BX-116 33689516

BX-117 33689517

BX-120 33689520

BX-128 33689528

BX-133 33689533

Description Part Number2 POSITION SPRING RETURN - 120 V 83400010

2 POSITION 120V 133# 2-SPDT 14266201

24V 2SPDT 0-10VDC 16022700

24V NO SW 0-10VDC 14219300

24V NO SW FLOATING 14266500

24V NO SW 0-10VDC 14266600


24V NO SW 0-10VDC 14266900

24V - PRGMABLE 14266304

24V WITH SW - PRGMAB 14266303

24V NO SW 0-10 VDC 14266300

24V NO SW 0-10VDC 14267100



148 of 198

26.2.2 Actuators Accessories

26.3 Burner Components

Note: For Complete Natural Gas or LP Burner Assemblies - Contact Factory

Description Part NumberMODULATING FOOT MOUNT WITH END SWITCH 83400051

24V NO SW SPRING RETURN 14321500

24V WITH SW ZERO SPAN SPRING RETURN 14321501

24V NO SW ZERO SPAN SPRING RETURN 14321502

20V WITH SW SPRING RETURN 14321510



24V NO SW SPRING RETURN 14321520



Description Part NumberSHORT CRANK ARM 81100051

DES FOR NM 1SPDT 14283701

CRANK/ARM ADP KIT FOR SM MOTORS 14286201

CRANK ARM KIT 16025200

CRANKARM ADAPT/NM 14286200

MOUNT/BRACK/NM 14300802

MOUNT SM/GM/MOTOR 14300801

CRANKARMW/BRACKET AF/NF 14300800

ACTUATOR POSITIONER - PANEL MOUNT 14297900

DES FOR SM/GM2SPDT 14283702

DES FOR SM/GM 1SPDT 14283700

DES/NM MOTORS/2SPDT 14283703

CRANKARM (FOR FOOT MOUNT ACTUATORS) 14160800

COVER TRANSFORMER 120VOLT TO 24VOLT 11136204

ACTUATOR POSITIONER - PANEL MOUNT 14321550

AUXILIARY SWITCH PACKAGE 14321551

FOOT MOUNT KIT (DIRECT DRIVE ACTUATOR) 14321560

Description Part NumberELECTRODE, FLAME ROD 14123203

ELECTRODE, SPARK ROD 14123204

PILOT ASSEMBLY/FLAME ROD/NAT GAS 14108433

PILOT ASSEMBLY/W-UV ADAPTER/NAT GAS 14108431

REMOTE FLAME ROD ASSEMBLY 14153220

REMOTE UV ADAPTER ASSEMBLY 14153221

PILOT LP ORFICE 14281221

BURNER SECTION (NAT GAS) - 6" (15.3CM) STRAIGHT 14107720

BURNER SECTION (NAT GAS) - 12" (30.5CM) STRAIGHT 14107620

BURNER SECTION (NAT GAS) - 12" (30.5CM) TEE 14108020

BURNER SECTION (NAT GAS) - 6" (15.3CM) STRAIGHT W/BACK FEED 14107820

BURNER SECTION (NAT GAS) - 12" (30.5CM) STRAIGHT W/BACK FEED 14107821

BURNER SECTION (LP) - 6" (15.3CM) STRAIGHT Contact Factory

BURNER SECTION (LP) - 12" (30.5CM) STRAIGHT Contact Factory

BURNER SECTION (LP) - 12" (30.5CM) TEE Contact Factory

BURNER SECTION (LP) - 6" (15.3CM) STRAIGHT W/BACK FEED Contact Factory

BURNER SECTION (LP) - 12" (30.5CM) STRAIGHT W/BACK FEED Contact Factory


149 of 198

26.4 Manifold Components

26.5 Combustion Components26.5.1 Combustion Components

Description Part NumberSOLENOID VALVE - 3/8" (PILOT) 14036400

SOLENOID VALVE - 1" 82500031

SOLENOID VALVE - 1.25" 82500040

SOLENOID VALVE - 1.5" 10762900

SOLENOID VALVE - 2" 82500060

Description Part NumberSOLENOID VALVE - POSITION INDICATION - 1" 82500032

SOLENOID VALVE - POSITION INDICATION - 1.25" 82500041

SOLENOID VALVE - POSITION INDICATION - 1.5" 82500051

SOLENOID VALVE - POSITION INDICATION - 2" 82500061

SOLENOID VENT VALVE - 3/4" 82500280

SOLENOID VENT VALVE - 1" 82500110

SOLENOID VENT VALVE - 1.25" 82500120

SOLENOID VENT VALVE - 1.5" 11056500

ON/OFF MOTORIZED ACTUATOR - 83400001

MOTORIZED PROOF OF CLOSURE ACTUATOR - 83400301

MOTORIZED PROOF OF CLOSURE VALVE BODY - 1" 82585171

MOTORIZED PROOF OF CLOSURE VALVE BODY - 1.25" 82585301


MOTORIZED PROOF OF CLOSURE VALVE BODY - 2" 82585261


MOTORIZED VALVE BODY - 1" 82580171

MOTORIZED VALVE BODY - 1.25" 82580181





PILOT REGULATOR - 325-3 X 3/8 14036300

MAIN REGULATOR LESS THAN 1 MBH - x 1" 82600030

MANUAL SHUT OFF VALVE - 3/8" 82580260

MANUAL SHUT OFF VALVE - 1" 82580010

MANUAL SHUT OFF VALVE - 1.25" 82580020





MODULATING VALVE LESS THAN 1 MBH - x1" 82600320

MODULATING VALVE - x 1" 10885900

MODULATING VALVE - x 1 1/4 " 82600240





REPLACEMENT MR212 MODULATING HEAD AND PLUNGER 11018200

Description Part NumberIGNITION TRANSFORMER 83000001

HIGH LIMIT 83200023

SUPPLY AIRFLOW SWITCH 83100001

VOLUME AIRFLOW SWITCH 83100001

LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH 83100023


150 of 198

HIGH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH 83100070

IGNITION CABLE (PER FOOT) 81400400

IGNITION CABLE BOOT 81150420

IGNITION CABLE SNAP FITTING 81150440

FIREYE ULTRA VIOLET SCANNER 83500022

HONEYWELL ULTRA VIOLET SCANNER 15159701

PILOT OFF TIMER 14197700


151 of 198

26.5.2 Flame Safeguards

26.6 Electrical Components26.6.1 Motor Protectors

Description Part NumberFLAME SAFEGUARD RELAY MODULE 15159600

FLAME RELAY SUB-BASE 15160001

AMPLIFIER - FLAME ROD 15159802

AMPLIFIER - ULTRAVIOLET 15159801

PURGE TIMER 7 SEC 15159701

FLAME SAFEGUARD RELAY MODULE 14169810

FLAME RELAY SUB-BASE 83500010

PROGRAMMER - RECYCLE 14170010

PROGRAMMER - NON-RECYCLE 14170011

AMPLIFIER - FLAME ROD 14169911

AMPLIFIER - ULTRAVIOLET 14169910

FLAME SAFEGUARD 800-001-00

REPLACEMENT FUSE FOR MEC120 CHASSIS 14204901

REPLACEMENT FUSE FOR M4RT1 CHASSIS 14204902

Description Part NumberRotary - .63-1 AMPS 14320505

Rotary - 1-1.6 AMPS 14320506‘

Rotary - 1.6-2.5 AMPS 14320507

Rotary - 2.5-4 AMPS 14320508

Rotary - 4-6.3 AMPS 14320510

Rotary - 6-10 AMPS 14320514

Rotary - 9-14 AMPS 14320516

Rotary - 13-18 AMPS 14320520

Rotary - 17-23 AMPS 14320521

Rotary - 20-25 AMPS 14320522

Rotary - 24-32 AMPS 14320532

Toggle - .63-1 AMPS 14320205

Toggle - 1-1.6 AMPS 14320206

Toggle - 1.6-2.5 AMPS 14320207

Toggle - 2.5-4 AMPS 14320208

Toggle - 4-6.3 AMPS 14320210

Toggle - 6-10 AMPS 14320214

Toggle - 9-14 AMPS 14320216

Toggle - 13-18 AMPS 14320220

Toggle - 17-23 AMPS 14320221

Toggle - 20-25 AMPS 14320222

Toggle - 24-32 AMPS 14320232

Toggle - 25-40 AMPS 14320340

Toggle - 45-63 AMPS 14320363

AUX CONTACT SIDE MOUNT 14320400

AUX CONTACT FRONT MOUNT 14320401


152 of 198

26.6.2 Contactors

26.6.3 Overloads

26.6.4 Temperature Controls

Description Part Number18 AMPS 14320703

25 AMPS 14320704

32 AMPS 14320705

40 AMPS 14320706

50 AMPS 14320707

65 AMPS 14320708

80 AMPS 14320709

115 AMPS 14320710

150 AMPS 14320711

Description Part Number.4-.63 AMPS 14320801

.63-1 AMPS 14320802

1-1.6 AMPS 14320803

1.6-2.5 AMPS 14320804

2.5-4 AMPS 14320805

4-6 AMPS 14320806

5.5-8 AMPS 14320807

7-10 AMPS 14320808

3-13 AMPS 14320809

12-18 AMPS 14320810

16-24 AMPS 14320811

23-32 AMPS 14320812

30-40 AMPS 14320813

37-50 AMPS 14320814

48-65 AMPS 14320815

55-70 AMPS 14320816

63-80 AMPS 14320817

80-104 AMPS 14320818

95-120 AMPS 14320819

110-140 AMPS 14320820

Description Part NumberROOM OVER-RIDE THERMOSTAT (OPTIONAL) 83200052

NIGHT THERMOSTAT (OPTIONAL) 83200052

BURNER ON/OFF OUTDOOR THERMOSTAT (OPTIONAL) 83200002

BURNER ON/OFF OUTDOOR THERMOSTAT (OPTIONAL) 83200001

DISCHARGE - SERIES 14 - 55-90 DEGREE 10948400

AMPLIFIER - SERIES 14 10938310

DISCHARGE SENSOR - SERIES 14 83200140

ROOM CONTROL - SERIES 44 - 55-90 DEGREE 11069300


AMPLIFIER - SERIES 44 LOW FIRE START 14258101


DISCHARGE - SERIES 94 DUAL SETPOINT - 60-90/80-180 DEGREE 14177901



MP2 SYSTEM (INCLUDES CONTROLLER AND AMPLIFIER) 14177502

MP2+ SYSTEM (INCLUDES CONTROLLER AND AMPLIFIER) 14177503

DISCHARGE SENSOR - SERIES MP2 14319411

TIMING BOARD - (OPTIONAL) 14177550

SIGNAL CONDITIONER 14174900

MAXIMUM FIRE POTENTIOMETER 14020000


153 of 198

26.6.5 Miscellaneous Electrical ComponentsDescription Part Number

CLOGGED FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH 8024206082 83100006

INDICATOR LIGHT - NEON - AMBER - 120 VAC 14297311

INDICATOR LIGHT - NEON - GREEN - 120 VAC 14297313

INDICATOR LIGHT - NEON - RED - 120 VAC 14297310

INDICATOR LIGHT - NEON - WHITE - 120 VAC 14297312

INDICATOR LIGHT LENSE (22.5MM) - AMBER 14183400

INDICATOR LIGHT LENSE (22.5MM) - RED 14183401

INDICATOR LIGHT LENSE (22.5MM) - GREEN 14183402

INDICATOR LIGHT LENSE (22.5MM) - YELLOW 14183403

INDICATOR LIGHT LENSE (22.5MM) - WHITE 14183404

INDICATOR LIGHT LENSE (22.5MM) - BLUE 14183405

Description Part NumberIndicator Light Unit (22.5mm) Incandescent 120 VAC 14183500

Indicator Light Unit (22.5mm) LED 120 VAC Red 14183503

Indicator Light Unit (22.5mm) LED 120 VAC Green 14183504

Indicator Light Unit (22.5mm) LED 120 VAC Yellow 14183505

Indicator Light Unit (22.5mm) LED 120 VAC Blue 14183506

Indicator Light Unit (22.5mm) LED 120 VAC White 14183507

Indicator Light Unit (22.5mm) LED 120 VAC Orange 14183508

Indicator Light Unit (22.5mm) LED 24 VAC/VDC 14183510

Low Limit (TT112 - TT 221) TCF313 w/10FT Sensor 14016902

Low Limit (TT224 - TT 236) TCF313 w/20FT Sensor 14016903

Minimum Air Pot 81600240

Pushbutton Switch (22.5mm) Operator - Blue 14178305

Pushbutton Switch (22.5mm) Operator - Yellow 14178306

Pushbutton Switch (22.5mm) Operator - Green 14178307

Pushbutton Switch (22.5mm) Operator - Red 14178308

Pushbutton Switch (22.5mm) Operator - Red / Mushroom Head 14178309

Selector Switch (22.5mm) 3 Position - Center Off 14135700

Selector Switch (22.5mm) 2 Position 14135800

Contact Block (22.5mm) Normally Open 14132601

Contact Block (22.5mm) Normally Closed 14132602

Process Electro/Mechanical Timer ACP #J-INM2W1/60MD6R - Range 0 to 60 Minutes 14020703

Process Purge/Cooldown Timer ERDM429 14084804

Relay - 4PDT 120 VAC w/Socket (10 A) 14132300

Relay - DPDT 120 VAC w/Socket (3 A) 14163900



Relay - DPDT 24 VDC w/Socket (3 A) 14236801

Time Clock 24HR PARAGON #4005-00S 14024100

Time Clock 7DAY Eelectro/Mechanical PARAGON 7008-00 10957200

Time Clock 7DAY Electronic GRASSLIN #FM1D20E-120 14182103

Toggle Switch - 3PDT ON/ON 14217303

Toggle Switch - DPDT-ON/OFF 14217304

Toggle Switch - DPDT-ON/OFF 14217301

Toggle Switch - DPDT-ON/OFF/ON 14217302

Toggle Switch - SPDT-ON/OFF 14217300

Transformer - 120-24V, 40VA 83000020

Transformer - 208|230|460 x 115, 500VA With Fuse Block 80300108

Transformer - 600|575 x 120/240|115/230, 500VA With Fuse Block 80300119

VFD Potentiometer - 10K Ohm - 534-1-1-103 15112100

VFD Potentiometer Knob - 91F2246 15045301

Day/Night Switch - Operator 14135800

Day/Night Switch - Contact Block 14132606

Summer/Off/Winter Switch - Operator 14135700

Summer/Off/Winter Switch - Contact Block (2 Req'd) 14132601


154 of 198

26.7 Miscellaneous Mechanical Components

26.7.1 Filters

Description Part NumberDoor Handle - Control Panel, Slotted, Compression 14303506

Door Handle - Cabinet Doors, Latch 10500401

Profile Quadrants #640 81100030

Volumatic Outdoor Pressure Sensor, Static Pressure Sensor Kit 33628800

Cabinet Door Gasket, Gasketing 1/2" x 3/4"W x Length (Sold per Foot) 10949903

Cabinet Insulation, 1"x 48"W 1.5LB Density (Sold per Foot) 81151630

Remote Temp. Sensor Bulb Holder #31126D 81100310

Pilot Gas and Airline Tubing 1/4" Aluminum (Sold per Foot) 81300781

Space Pressure Guage Magnehelic® Range .5-0-.5" W.C. 14115101

Space Pressure Controller Mounting Bracket Photohelic® Style 34061400

Space Pressure Guage/Controller Fitting Swivel Elbow 14191300

Space Pressure Guage/Controller Fitting Elbow Compression 1/4 O.D. x 1/8 MPT 81208000

Space Pressure Controller Airline Tubing, Blue (Sold by the Foot) 81300784

Model Description Size (in) Part Number Quantity

TT112 & TT115

Permanent 2 x 20 x 20 82400160 3

2 x 16 x 20 82400140 3

Disposable2 x 20 x 20 82400070 3

2 x 16 x 20 82400050 3

30% Pleated2 x 20 x 20 82402870 3

2 x 16 x 20 82402850 3

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 20 14074201 3

16 x 20 14074203 3

Optional Fresh Air Hood Mounted Permanent 2 x 16 x 25 82400150 2

2 x 20 x 25 82400170 2

TT118

Permanent 2 x 20 x 25 82400170 6

Disposable 2 x 20 x 25 82400080 6

30% Pleated 2 x 20 x 25 82402860 6

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 25 14074202 6

TT212

Permanent 2 x 20 x 20 82400160 9

Disposable 2 x 20 x 20 82400070 9

30% Pleated 2 x 20 x 20 82402870 9

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 20 14074201 9


TT215

Permanent 2 x 20 x 25 82400170 4

2 x 16 x 25 82400150 4

Disposable2 x 20 x 25 82400080 4

2 x 16 x 25 82400060 4

30% Pleated2 x 20 x 25 82402860 4

2 x 16 x 25 82402830 4

30% Poly Flat Panel 2 x 20 x 25 14074202 4

2 x 16 x 25 14074200 4


2 x 16 x 25 82400150 4

TT218

Permanent 2 x 20 x 20 82400160 8

2 x 16 x 20 82400140 8

Disposable2 x 20 x 20 82400070 8

2 x 16 x 20 82400050 8

30% Pleated2 x 20 x 20 82402870 8

2 x 16 x 20 82402850 8

30% Poly Flat Panel 2 x 20 x 20 14074201 8

2 x16 x 20 14074203 8


2 x 20 x 25 82400170 6

TT221

Permanent 2 x 20 x 25 82400170 16

Disposable 2 x 20 x 25 82400080 16

30% Pleated 2 x 20 x 25 82402860 16

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 25 14074202 16



155 of 198

TT224

Permanent 2 x 20 x 20 82400160 18

2 x 20 x 25 82400170 12

Disposable2 x 20 x 20 82400070 18

2 x 20 x 25 82400080 12

30% Pleated2 x 20 x 20 82402870 18

2 x 20 x 25 82402860 12

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 20 14074201 18

20 x 25 14074202 12


2 x 20 x 25 82400170 12

Model Description Size (in) Part Number Quantity

TT230

Permanent 2 x 20 x 20 82400160 6

2 x 20 x 25 82400170 30

Disposable2 x 20 x 20 82400070 6

2 x 20 x 25 82400080 30

30% Pleated2 x 20 x 20 82402870 6

2 x 20 x 25 82402860 30

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 20 14074201 6

20 x 25 14074202 30

TT233

Permanent 2 x 20 x 20 82400160 56

Disposable 2 x 20 x 20 82400070 56

30% Pleated 2 x 20 x 20 82402870 56

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 20 14074201 56

TT236

Permanent 2 x 20 x 20 82400160 63

Disposable 2 x 20 x 20 82400070 63

30% Pleated 2 x 20 x 20 82402870 63

30% Poly Flat Panel 20 x 20 14074201 63


156 of 198

SECTION 27: TROUBLESHOOTING










DANGER


Falling Hazard



WARNING


Burn Hazard


Internal compo-nents of equipment may still be hot after operation.

Explosion Hazard

Turn off gas supply to equipment before service.

Fire Hazard

Keep all flammable objects, liquids and vapors the minimum required clearances to combustibles away from equipment.


Cut/Pinch Hazard


Edges are sharp.


157 of 198

The following is divided into two basic categories - fan problems and burner problems. In some cases, they

interrelate. In order to use this effectively, you should familiarize yourself with both categories.

27.1 Initial Checks

When encountering any abnormal operation or fault conditions of the equipment, all troubleshooting should

start with the following initial checks. If a problem is discovered in these initial checks, it must be corrected

before moving on in the trouble shooting.

1. Compare voltage and phase of supply power on site with rating plate information.

2. Review wiring between remote panel and control panel. Do the electrical connections match the sup-

plied wiring diagram?

3. Compare gas type and supply pressure on site with rating plate information.

4. Check for proper blower rotation - on air handler and any exhaust blowers.

• Blowers powered with a three phase motor can be reversed by swapping any two incoming power

legs. For blowers powered by a single phase motor, refer to the motor rating plate for reversing

instructions.

27.2 Supply FanPROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTIONBlower motor does not run Damper limit switch not closed or inoperative. Repair or replace switch.

Motor thermal over-loads tripped. For tripped condition-reset.

Fuses blown or missing. Replace.

External power source lacking. Have incoming power lines checked.

Motor inoperative. Repair or replace.

Blower motor runs, but fans

do not supply enough

make-up air

Belts broken or loose. Readjust or replace.

Intake filters dirty. Replace or clean.

Obstruction in intake. Check dampers for proper opera-

tion. Clear all intake passages of

obstructions.

Fan wheel loose on shaft. Reposition and tighten.

Access doors and panels not closed. Close.

Excessive discharge resistance from:

Dirty filters in discharge.

External dampers.

Clean filters and/or readjust

dampers.

Excessive fan noise Fan bearing Replace.

Fan sheave loose on shaft. Tighten.

Belts not adjusted. Readjust.

Fan wheel loose on shaft. Reposition and retighten.

Fan wheel rubbing. Loosen setscrews. Reposition wheel

and tighten.

Fan wheel dirty. Clean.

Loose duct. Tighten or reinforce.

Foreign article in fan or duct. Remove.


158 of 198

27.3 BurnerPROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTIONFlame control does not try

for ignition

Auxiliary contact "M1" not closed? Properly mount contact or replace

Replace switch

High temp limit switch tripped? Manually reset or replace

Low airflow pressure switch contacts not made? Check blower operation

Reconnect tubes to pressure switch

Clean pressure test tubes

Check filters/duct work for restric-

tions

High airflow pressure switch contacts are open? Check blower FLA and compare to

data plate.

Cabinet pressure too high, check

system setup and for restrictions

down stream of blower.

Optional: Mild weather stat, dial set to low Set dial higher

Replace stat

High gas pressure switch Manual reset

Verify gas pressure

Optional: Low gas pressure switch Manual reset

Verify gas pressure

Flame control defect Replace

Burner Lockout

Failure to ignite pilot or main flame.

Flame control failure.

Reset the flame control module at

the unit and proceed to the next

step, observing the unit to indicate

at which step lockout condition

occures.

No PILOT flame No spark Check wiring from burner control to

ignition transformer

Check high tension wire to spark

plug

Replace ignition transformer

No gas Open manual gas shut off valves

Check wiring from burner control to

pilot gas valve

Verify inlet gas pressure

Adjust pilot gas pressure

Replace pilot gas valve

Check burner pilot opening for

obstruction

Pilot flame does not stay lit Improper pilot gas pressure Adjust pilot gas pressure

UV flame scanner dirty Clean UV scanner


159 of 198

Burner (continued)

27.4 Temperature Controls

If temperature control problems occur and are not

remedied in the troubleshooting procedure, refer to

the trouble shooting table for the unit specific

temperature control amplifier.

1. For units with the Maxitrol series 14 tempera-

ture controls, refer to the Field Service Check

List for Series 14. Series 14 are supplied on

units equipped with DAT and DATRO style

remote panels.




units equipped with RMTC remote panels.




units equipped with WRP style remote panels.

4. For units with the Maxitrol series MP tempera-


List for Series MP. Series MP are supplied on

units equipped with WRP remote panels.

If problems persist after performing the

troubleshooting procedure and the temperature

control troubleshooting procedure contact the factory.

27.5 Series 14 - Preliminary Circuit Analysis

For ease in troubleshooting, it is advisable to wire the

system as follows (this differs from the normal

connection).

• The Discharge Air Sensor is disconnected and

replaced with a 10,000 ohm, 1/2 watt test resistor

(terminals 3 and 4). If inlet air sensor is being

used, disconnect and replace with a jumper. On

units where the Remote Temperature Selector is

located a considerable distance from the heater, it

may be advantageous to connect the selector at

the heater location.

1. Connect a DC volt meter (capable of reading 0-

24 V DC) on the Modulator or Modulator-Regu-

lator Valve terminals. Set the temperature to

the minimum dial setting. The DC voltage

should read 0 volts. The DC voltage should

gradually increase to at least 20 volts as you

slowly rotate the dial to the maximum dial set-

ting. If these voltages are obtained, the valve

function can now be checked out.

2. The operation of the Valve with regard to volt-

age is as follows: from 0 volts to approximately

5 volts, the modulating valve should be on

bypass flow with the heater operating on low or

minimum fire. From approximately 5 volts to 15

volts DC, the valve should be performing its

modulating function, and the heater should be

firing at a modulated flow rate between low and

high fire, depending upon the voltage. Above

approximately 15 volts DC, the Valve should be

delivering full flow to the heater and the unit

should be on full fire. If the DC voltage is

obtained on the Valve terminals, but the heater

does not respond as described, the problem

can be isolated to the valve itself or to the gas

control manifold of the heater.

3. In the event proper voltages are obtained, and

the Valve responds correctly to these DC volt-

ages, the problem could well be in the wiring

leading to the Discharge Air Sensor or the Dis-

charge Air Sensor itself.

4. If the proper voltages are not obtained when

wired as instructed, the problem can be iso-

lated to the electronics and this may once

again be reviewed in the check list.

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTIONNo main flame Manual shut off valve closed Open manual shut off valve

Safety Shut Off Valve not operating. Is there

positive gas pressure downstream of SSOV?

Check wiring from burner control to

SSOV

Verify inlet gas pressure

Replace SSOV

Minimum gas supply pressure Verify minimum gas supply pressure as

per data plate is available

Burner openings obstructed Remove obstruction

Clean burner orifice holes

Improper burner low fire adjustment on modu-

lating valve

Adjust low fire as per the relevant Max-

itrol temperature control instructions.


160 of 198

5. After test, remove the test resistor and recon-

nect the Discharge Air Sensor to terminals 3

and 4. If Remote Temperature Selector has

been moved return it to its original position.

27.5.1 Series 14 - Low Fire Start Time Adjustment1. On the "L" suffix amplifiers, the low fire start

duration is adjustable from approximately 0-30

seconds, and begins timing after the amplifier

has been energized.

2. High fire is delayed, and the M/MR valve

remains in the low fire setting position during

the delay time period.

3. Use a small screwdriver to adjust the time

delay potentiometer.

• Turn clockwise (+) to increase low fire start

duration, and counter-clockwise (-) to

decrease low fire start duration.

27.5.2 Series 14 - Sensitivity Adjustment• The sensitivity control will allow the user to control

the response of the system. Caution should be

exercised in the use of this adjustment. Under

normal usage the pointer should be located on

the mark on the label.

• If hunting is encountered (rapid oscillation),

rotating the sensitivity control counter-clockwise

will dampen the oscillation - stabilizing the flame.

• DO NOT adjust unless necessary, because

decreasing the sensitivity will increase the

temperature "DROOP" of the system.

27.5.3 Series 14 - Temperature Calibration

NOTE: The components of this system are

individually calibrated and are not part of a matched

set. It is necessary to place an accurate temperature

measuring device as near the discharge air sensor

as possible. Set the remote temperature selector at

least 10° above outside air temperatures.

1. Calibrating at the remote temperature selector:

• If measured temperature is below set

temperature, rotate the calibration

potentiometer clockwise until the correct

temperature is obtained.

• If the temperature is above the set point the

potentiometer should be turned counter-

clockwise.

• Proceed slowly with the above steps so as

to allow the temperature measuring

instrument to catch up with the change in

temperature.

2. Calibrating at the Amplifier:

• Adjust calibration potentiometer until

temperature reads the same as the set

temperature.

• If the temperature is below the set point,

then rotate calibration potentiometer

clockwise.

• If the temperature is above the set point,

rotate the potentiometer counter-clockwise.

• Proceed slowly with the above steps so as

to allow the temperature measuring

instrument to catch up with the change in

temperature.


161 of 198


162 of 198

27.5.4 Series 14 - Field Service Checklist

SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE

A. No Gas Flow 1. Modulating valve improperly installed.

B. Continuous Low Fire (electronics problem). 2. Short circuit or no voltage to the amplifi er.3. Open circuit in TD114. Remote Temperature Selector circuit or wiring.4. Short circuit in TS114, Discharge Air Sensor circuit or wiring.5. Faulty amplifi er.

C. Continuous Low Fire (electronics ok) 6. Short circuit or open circuit in Modulator Coil.7. Plunger missing, jammed or improperly installed.

D. Incorrect Minimum Fire Erratic or Pulsating Flame. 8. Incorrect by-pass metering valve adjustment.9. Excessive negative burner pressure.

E. Continuous High Fire (electronics problem). 10. Short circuit in TD114 Remote Temperature Selector circuit or wiring.11. Open circuit in TS114/TS10765. Discharge or Inlet Air Sensor Circuit or wiring.12. Jumper not connected across amplifi er terminals 2 and 3.

F. Continuous High Fire (electronics ok). 13. Foreign object holding valve open.14. Plunger jammed.

G. Incorrect Maximum Fire. 15. Inlet pressure too low.16. Incorrect outlet pressure adjustment of Pressure Regulator.

H. Erratic or Pulsating Flame. 17. Hunting18. Erratic air patterns or improper TS114 location.19. Wiring is run next to high voltage switching circuits causing induced voltages.20. Faulty Amplifi er or erratic voltage supply.

I. Incorrect Discharge Air Temperature 21. Inlet Air Sensor is used.22. Incorrect Wiring.23. System out of calibration.24. Improper TS114 location.25. Room Override Thermostat circuit closed.

J. Burned out Transformer. 26. Short circuit in modulator coil.27. Short circuit between amplifi er and modulator valve.

K. Discharge Air Temperature too Low when T115 is Opera-tive

28. Too low an Override Temperature setting.29. Burner capacity may be insufficient.


163 of 198

FIELD TEST REMEDY

1. Arrow on side of Valve should point in direction of gas fl ow. 1. Install properly.

2. Check for 24VAC at amplifi er terminals 7 & 8.3. Inspect for loose or broken wires between amplifi er terminals 1 & 2, and TD114 terminals 1 & 2, and TD114 terminals 1 & 3.4. Connect test resistor as described in Preliminary Circuit Analysis, in Max-itrol product information sheet. Follow procedure outlined.5. Check items 2, 3, and 4.

2. Prove the power source.3. Tighten connections or replace wiring.4. If modulating voltages are obtained, Check TS114 circuit for shorts. Replace TS114 if necessary.5. If items 2, 3, and 4 check out and modulating voltages are still not obtained, amplifi er may be assumed faulty. Replace.

6. Measure resistance across modulator terminals with connecting wires detached.7. Inspect. Plunger should be installed per diagrams in Maxitrol information sheet and operate freely in solenoid sleeve.

6. Replace modulator head if not approximately 45-55 ohms for M611 Valve and 60-80 ohms for MR212 Valve.7. Clean or replace plunger if necessary. Install per Maxitrol product information sheet.

8. See valve adjustments in Section 19.5.9. Measure manifold pressure as outlined in Section 19.4.

8. Adjust to proper minimum fi re.9. If reading is greater than 1.0 in wc negative pressure, check for clogged fi lters or other inlet air restrictions. Consult factory for other solutions.

10. Inspect for shorts at or between Amplifi er terminals 1 & 2 or TD114 termi-nals 1 & 3.11. Check TS114/TS10765 for open internal circuit. Connect test resistor as described in Preliminary Circuit Analysis, in Maxitrol product information sheet. Follow procedure outlined.12. Inspect

10. Correct wiring if shorts exist.11. If modulating voltages are obtained, check TS114/TS10765 for open circuits. Replace TS114/TS10765.12. Correct the wiring.

13. Remove button plate and inspect valve and seat.14. Inspect. Plunger should be smooth, clean, and operate freely in solenoid sleeve.

13. Clean seat. Clean valve or replace if necessary.14. Clean, or if necessary, replace plunger.

15. Read pressure at inlet to modulating valve using a manometer with unit operating at full fi re. Pressure should be equal to the sum of outlet pressure setting plus pressure drop of the valve (see Maxitrol capacity chart).16. Read manifold pressure using manometer and compare with recommen-dation of equipment manufacturer.

15. Increase inlet pressure if possible.16. See valve adjustments in Section 19.5.

17. Adjust sensitivity control counter-clockwise.18. Connect test resistor as described in Preliminary Circuit Analysis, in Maxitrol product information sheet. Turn TD114 selector dial so heater goes through its entire modulating range.19. Temporarily wire each of TD114, TS114, and MR212 externally and ob-serve heater/equipment operation.20. With test resistor connected (per item #18) and TD114 locally connected (per item #19), turn TD114 selector dial through entire modulating range. Ob-serve D.C. voltage across modulator terminals.

17. If fl ame stabilizes, adjust sensitivity control to maintain an even fl ame.18. If the fl ame is steady throughout the entire modulating range, the TS114 must be moved.19. If smooth operation results, isolate effected wiring from source of induced voltage.20. If erratic or unstable DC voltages are obtained throughout the modulating range, the amplifi er may be assumed faulty. Replace. If erratic operation is noted only over a small range of 2 or 3 volts, the volt-age source may contain surges. Consult factory.

21. Inlet Air Sensor changes 1°, for each 3.5°, 5°, or 8° outside temperature change from 60° (pre-determined - turndown varies with model used).22. Check wiring diagrams per maxitrol product.*23. Sensed temperature (thermometer next to TS114) does not correspond to TD114 setting.24. Sensed temperature (thermometer next to TS114) does not represent average discharge air temperature.25. Remove Override Thermostat lead from terminal 2 of TD114.*information sheet

21. Sensed temperature will vary from TD114 dial settings. This is intentional.22. Correct wiring.23. See calibration procedure.24. Move TS114 to location where average representative temperature can be sensed.25. TD114 dial setting, then check thermostat setting and/or check wir-ing for shorts.

26. Measure resistance across modulator terminals with red lead wires disconnected.27. Inspect wiring.

26. Replace modulator head if less than 40 ohms.27. Correct wiring if short is found.

28. Check “Override Temperature Selector” of TD114.29. Check for high fi re (Maximum manifold pressure specifi ed for heater).

28. Reset to correct temperature.29. If on high fi re, control can do no more. Heater unable to furnish ad-ditional heat to raise temperature.


164 of 198


This Preliminary Circuit Analysis will provide

identification of faulty components, improper wiring or

calibration, and other difficulties.

NOTE: All voltages and resistance readings are

approximate.

1. Disconnect the room temperature control from

terminals #4 & #5 of the amplifier.

2. Connect a 2K Ohm resistor in series with a 10K

Ohm potentiometer to terminals #4 & #5 of the

amplifier and install a jumper between

terminals #1 & #3 of the amplifier.

3. Connect a DC voltmeter to amplifier terminals

#6 & #7.

4. Turn the Test-Potentiometer to minimum

resistance (2,000 ohms).

5. The DC voltage should read 0 volts.

6. Turn the Test-Potentiometer slowly to maxi-

mum resistance (12,000 ohms).

7. The DC voltage should gradually increase to at

least 18 volts.

8. If proper voltages are observed continue on

with step #9.

If proper voltages are not observed, the problem is

identified with the Amplifier, the 24-volt AC power

supply, or the circuit connected to terminals #6 & #7.

9. Turn power OFF, remove the discharge sensor

from the amplifier, and relocate the jumper to

terminals #2 & #3 of the amplifier. Relocate the

resistor and test potentiometer to terminals #1

& #5 of the amplifier, turn power ON.

10. Turn Test-Potentiometer to minimum

resistance, the voltage should be 0 volts.

11. Turn Test-Potentiometer slowly to maximum

resistance, the DC voltage should gradually

increase to at least 18 volts.

12. If proper voltages are observed in all of the

above steps, the amplifier is satisfactory.

If proper voltages are not observed, continue testing

to identify the difficulty. Faults may be identified with

the amplifier, the 24 V power supply, or the circuit

connected to terminals #6 & #7.

Observe burner flames and/or burner pressure as

Test- Potentiometer is turned through full range.

NOTE: From 0-5 volts, heater should be at by-pass

or low, 5-15 volts, heater should respond with various

input rates; beyond 15 volts, heater is at maximum

input.

If proper operation is observed, continue procedure

to check operation of sensing and selecting

components. If proper operation is not observed, see

Field Service Checklist to test M or MR valves and

connecting wiring.

13. With proper voltages observed thus far and

modulator responding correctly, wire the sys-

tem as in steps #1 & #2, except have discharge

air monitor connected in place of jumper. Set

MIN temperature selector at least 10 °F above

outdoor temperature. Set MAX temperature

selector at mid-range. Heater is now under

control by the discharge air monitor.

14. Turn Test-Potentiometer to maximum resis-

tance, delivered air temperature should be per

MAX temperature setting.

15. Turn Test-Potentiometer to minimum resis-

tance, delivered air temperature should be per

MIN temperature setting.

If proper delivered air temperatures are observed,

the problem is identified with the space temperature

sensing and/or temperature selecting components

and circuits.

If proper delivered air temperatures are not

observed, check calibration.

16. 16.After test, remove all test equipment and

reconnect all components.

27.6.1 Series 44 - Low Fire Start Time Adjustment1. On the "L" suffix amplifiers, the low fire start

duration is adjustable from approximately 0-30

seconds, and begins timing after the amplifier

has been energized.

2. High fire is delayed, and the M/MR valve

remains in the low fire setting position during

the delay time period.

3. 3.Use a small screwdriver to adjust the time

delay potentiometer.

• Turn clockwise (+) to increase low fire start

duration, and counter-clockwise (-) to

decrease low fire start duration.

27.6.2 Series 44 -Sensitivity Adjustment• The sensitivity control will allow the user to control

the response of the system. Caution should be

exercised in the use of this adjustment. Under

normal usage the pointer should be located on

the mark of the label.


165 of 198

• If hunting is encountered (rapid oscillation),

rotating the sensitivity control counterclockwise

may dampen the oscillation, stabilizing the flame.

• DO NOT adjust unless necessary, because

decreasing the sensitivity will increase the

temperature "DROOP" of the system.

27.6.3 Series 44 -Temperature Calibration

NOTE: All electronic components are pre-calibrated

to a base resistance. This permits field replacement

without upsetting system calibration.

27.6.3.1 Minimum Discharge Air Temperature1. Install a thermometer or other temperature

measuring device at a point adjacent to the tip

of the Discharge Air Monitor.

2. Connect a wire jumper between terminals #4

and #5. Be sure minimum temperature setting

is at least ten degrees higher than outdoor

temperature.

3. Turn the calibrating potentiometer until the

reading of the thermometer adjacent to the

Discharge Air Monitor agrees with the mini-

mum setting of the Discharge Air Temperature

Selector.

• Clockwise rotation increases.

4. Remove jumper.

27.6.3.2 Maximum Discharge Air Temperature1. Install a thermometer or other temperature

measuring device at a point adjacent to the tip

of the Discharge Air Monitor.

2. Disconnect wires from terminals #4 & #5. Con-

nect 12K resistor across terminals #4 & #5.

3. Turn the calibrating potentiometer (B), until the

reading of the thermometer adjacent to the

Discharge Air Monitor agrees with the maxi-

mum setting of the Discharge Air Temperature

Selector.

• Clockwise rotation increases temperature

Be sure temperature setting does not

exceed the design temperature rise of the

air handler.

4. Remove resistor and reconnect wires.

27.6.3.3 Space Temperature1. Install a thermometer or other temperature

measuring device at a point adjacent to the

Discharge Air Temperature Selector. Set the

Discharge Air Temperature Selector for the

desired room temperature. Because of the

large space being heated, wait at least one half

hour to make certain adjustment is needed.

2. If the temperature reading is different from the

temperature setting, turn (C) clockwise for an

increase in space temperature and counter-

clockwise for a decrease in temperature. Each

increment on adjustment C is approximately

2.5 degrees.

3. After an adjustment has been made, give the

room temperature at least one half hour to set-

tle out before rechecking.


166 of 198


SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE

A. No gas fl ow. 1. Valve improperly installed.

B. Continuous low fi re (electronics ok). 2. Open circuit in modulator coil.3. Plunger missing, jammed or improperly installed.4. Ruptured main or balancing diaphragm.

C. Continuous Low Fire (electronics problem) 5. No voltage to the amplifi er.6. Short in modulator coil circuit.7. Short in TS144 circuit.8. Faulty amplifi er.

D. Incorrect Low Fire 9. Incorrect by-pass metering valve adjustment.10. Excessive negative burner pressure.

E. Continuous Minimum Discharge Air Temperature 11. Faulty amplifi er.12. Short in T244 or TS244/TD244 circuit13. Incorrect space temperature calibration.

F. Incorrect Max. or Min. Discharge Air Temperature. 14. Improper TS144 location.15. Incorrect discharge air temperature calibrations

G. Continuous High Fire (electronics ok) 16. Foreign material holding valve open.17. Plunger jammed.

H. Continuous High Fire. (electronics problem) 18. Open circuit in TS144

I. Incorrect High Fire 19. Inlet pressure too low.20. Incorrect outlet pressure adjustment.

J. Continuous Maximum Discharge Air Temperature 21. Faulty amplifi er.22. Open circuit in T244 to TS244/TD24423. Incorrect space temperature calibration.

K. Burned out Transformer. No Voltage to Amplifi er 24. Short in modulator coil circuit.

L. Incorrect Space Temperature. 25. Incorrect maximum discharge air temperature setting (A1044).26. Incorrect minimum discharge air temperature setting (A1044).27. Insufficient burner capacity.28. Incorrect space temperature calibration.

*Control circuits external to the Series 44 can cause burner malfunction. Always check manual valve to be certain gas is on, and check limit control for normal operation.


167 of 198

FIELD TEST REMEDY

1. Arrow on side of valve should point in direction of gas fl ow. 1. Install properly.

2. Remove wires connected to amplifi er terminals 6 & 7 and mea-sure resistance. MR212 (60-80 ohms), M611 (45-55 ohms).3. Inspect - plunger should be installed per Maxitrol product infor-mation sheet and operate freely in solenoid sleeve.4. Disassemble valve for inspection of internal parts.

2. If proper resistance values are not observed, replace modulator head or repair wiring.3. Clean or replace plunger if necessary and install per Maxitrol product infor-mation sheet.4. Replace diaphragm if ruptured.

5. Check for 24VAC at amplifi er terminals 8 & 9.6. Measure resistance per item 2.7. Remove wires connected to amplifi er terminals 1, 2, & 3. Mea-sure resistance across wires 1 & 3, then 2 & 3. Meter should read greater than 2500 ohms.8. Follow procedures outlined in “PRELIMINARY CIRCUIT ANALY-SIS” (Sections I & II) in Maxitrol product information sheet.

5. Provide 24VAC to amplifi er. Refer to item 24.6. If proper resistance values are not observed, replace modulator head or repair wiring.7. If readings are incorrect, replace the TS144 or repair wiring.8. If power source and modulator coil check out (items 5 & 6) but proper modu-lating voltages cannot be obtained, then amplifi er may be assumed at fault. Install replacement amplifi er.

9. See Valve Adjustments - Section 19.5.10. Measure manifold pressure as outlined in Section 19.4.

9. Adjust to proper low fi re.10. If greater than 1.0 in wc negative pressure, check equipment for clogged fi lters & other inlet air restrictions. For other solutions, consult factory.

11. Follow procedures outlined in “PRELIMINARY CIRCUIT ANALY-SIS” (sections I & II), in Maxitrol product information sheet.12. Remove wires connected to amplifi er terminals 4 & 5. Set T244 or TD244 to maximum setting. Measure resistance across wires. Meter should read 6000 ohms +/- 1000 (T244). If TS244/TD244 are used, meter should read 4500 ohms +/- 1000 (TS244) and 2100 ohms +/- 150 (TD244).13. Follow procedures outlined in “PRELIMINARY CIRCUIT ANALY-SIS” (Sections IV), in Maxitrol product information sheet.

11. If amplifi er is proven at fault, install replacement amplifi er.12. If reading is incorrect, replace the T244, TS244/TD244 or repair wiring.13. If proper action is obtained, fi rst check item 12. Recalibrate if necessary See section 19.7.

14. Compare sensed temperature reading at TS144 with average discharge air temperature.15. Follow procedures outlined in “PRELIMINARY CIRCUIT ANALY-SIS” (Sections IV), in Maxitrol product information sheet.

14. Move TS144 to location where average temperature can be sensed.15. If proper temperatures are not observed, refer to temperature calibration procedures, in Maxitrol product information sheet.

16. Remove button Plate and inspect valve and seat17. Inspect - plunger should be smooth and clean and operate freely in solenoid sleeve.

16. Clean, replace valve and/or seat if necessary.17. Clean, or if necessary, replace plunger.

18. Measure resistance per item 7. 18. If readings are incorrect, replace the TS144 or repair wiring.

19. Read inlet pressure at valve, using a manometer with heater operating at full fi re. Pressure should be at least equal to the sum of: outlet pressure setting and pressure drop of the valve (See Max-itrol Capacity Chart Bulletin) plus 1.0 in wc.20. Read outlet pressure using manometer and compare with recommendation of equipment manufacturer.

19. Increase inlet pressure if possible or change to larger valve. Consult factory about possibility of using special spring to reduce pressure drop on selected installations.20. See valve adjustments in section 19.5.

21. Follow procedure outlined in “PRELIMINARY CIRCUIT ANALY-SIS” (Sections I & II), in Maxitrol product information sheet.22. Measure resistance per item 12.23. Follow procedures outlined in “PRELIMINARY CIRCUIT ANALYSIS: (Section IV), in Maxitrol product information sheet.

21. If amplifi er is proven at fault, install replacement amplifi er.22. If reading is incorrect, replace the T244, TS244/TD244 or repair wiring.23. If proper action is obtained, fi rst check item 22. Recalibrate if necessary. Refer to Temperature Calibration Proceedures in Maxitrol product information sheet

24. Measure resistance per item 2. 24. If proper resistances are not observed, replace modulator head or repair wiring.

25. Check to see if heater is delivering air at maximum discharge air setting.26. Check to see if heater is delivering air at maximum discharge air setting.27. Check to see if heater is operating at high fi re.28. Place thermometer next to T244 or TS244. Compare space temperature reading with T244 or TD244 dial setting.

25. If desired temperature is not reached, increase maximum discharge air temperature setting.26. If desired space temperature is not reached, decrease minimum discharge air temperature setting.27. If desired space temperature is not reached with heater at high fi re, it may be undersized. Consult manufacturer.28. If temperature reading is incorrect, check items 25, 26, & 27, then recalibrate if necessary.


168 of 198


In order to diagnose the cause of problems in this

system it is necessary to determine certain values. It

is helpful to have a volt/ohm multimeter.

Modulation Function: If sensed temperature

(controller display) is less than minimum dial setting

temperature, perform Step 1 below; otherwise

continue on to Step 2.

Temperature Sensor Function: Perform the entire

"Modulation Function" analysis, implementing Step 1.

(Step 1 isolates the sensor function from the

system).

1. Disconnect the sensor wires to terminals

(amplifier - 8 and 9, amplifier/selector - 1 and

2) and replace with supplied test resistor or

with other means to obtain a resistance value

falling within the temperature range to be

tested, referencing temperature table below.*

2. Connect a DC volt meter to terminals 3 and 4,

or at the M/MR valve terminals. Do not discon-

nect existing wiring.

3. Rotate temperature dial knob to maximum set-

ting - the DC volts should read at least 17.5 V

DC. Rotate temperature dial knob to minimum

setting - the DC volts should read no more than

2.0 V DC. DC voltage should gradually

increase as the dial temperature setting is

slowly rotated up to and past the controller's

digital display temperature.

Table 43: Resistance/Temperature Table

Approximate controller display temperature with 1100 to 1800 ohms resistance across terminals (amplifier - 8 and 9, amplifier/selector - 1 and 2).

27.7.1 Series 94 - Temperature Calibration

Occasionally the set point that is indicated on the

dial does not match the LED display. This is usually a

indication that calibration is required. To calibrate the

set-point controls, follow the steps listed below. The

LED display is to be considered master, during these

steps.

27.7.1.1 Calibration of Spray Temperature Selector

NOTE: Calibration can not be done if room

temperature is 90 °F or higher.

1. Place the Summer/Off/Winter switch in the

Winter position.

2. Loosen the setscrew that holds the knob to the

shaft of the selector.

3. Rotate the knob, taking care not to move the

shaft, in the direction needed to align the dial

setting to the LED display.

4. Tighten down the setscrew.

• Calibration is now complete.

27.7.1.2 Calibration of Dry Temperature Selector1. Activate the dry cycle.

2. Place the Summer/Off/Winter switch in the

Winter position.

3. Loosen the setscrew that holds the knob to the

shaft of the selector.

4. Rotate the knob, taking care not to move the

shaft, in the direction needed to align the dial

setting to the LED display.

5. Tighten down the setscrew.

• Calibration is now complete.

R (ohms) T (degrees)1,100 78 °F (25 °C)

1,200 125 °F (50 °C)

1,300 172 °F (80 °C)

1,400 220 °F (100 °C)

1,500 270 °F (130 °C)

1,600 15 °F (160 °C)

1,700 365 °F (185 °C)

1,800 410 °F (210 °C)


169 of 198


170 of 198



171 of 198


172 of 198

27.8 Series MP - Trouble Shooting

The MP2 and MP2+ have built in diagnostics; refer to the following programming guides for setup and

troubleshooting information.

Thoroughly read entire MP Section to guarantee proper usage of MP2 or MP2+ system. MP2+ system

requires initial programming before accessing process menu. See Page 181, Section 27.8.5

27.8.1 Series MP2 User Information and Programming GuideTable 44: Process Menu

27.8.1.1 Operation Menu

Process Set Point1 A maximum of 8 Process Set Points are available with a temperature range of 60 °F (15 °C) to 240 °F (115 °C).

2 The Process Set Point is displayed as "SP."

3 Process Set Points not being used can be turned to an "Off" setting.

Process Times

Note: TM02

required.

Any of the 8 Processes can be timed. Each timed Process has a range of 00:00:01 to 23:59:59. The conclusion of a timed Pro-

cess will immediately proceed into the next Process. If the last Process of the program is timed, it will proceed to the selected

start position (see Looping Mode) after timing out. The letter "T" will be displayed indicating a timed Process. Press the up or

down arrows on the TDM02 to scroll between the screens showing the Process Set Point and the sensed temperature AND the

sensed temperature with the time remaining in the Process (hh:mm:ss).

Soft Start The Soft Start feature controls the initial rate of voltage change to the modulator.

Soft Start operates when switching from a lower Process temperature to a higher Process

temperature. It is designed to slow the initial input rate to the burner. This feature is avail-

able in three settings: slow, medium, and fast and may be turned off. "Ss" (slow), "Sm"

(medium) or "Sf" (fast) is displayed during the time the Soft Start is active. This feature is

comprehensive to all Set Points.

NOTE: Global Setting for MP2+ system.

Max Valve VDC This feature limits the maximum voltage applied to the modulator. It has a setting

range of 7 to 25 VDC. This feature is comprehensive to all Set Points.


Max Ramp VDC This feature limits the maximum voltage applied to the modulator while operating in the

Ramping mode. It has a setting range of 5 to 24 VDC. This setting cannot exceed the max-

imum voltage output setting. This feature is comprehensive to all Set Points.

Total Bandwidth

This feature determines the amount of temp. change required to drive the modulator from

the minimum fire setting to the maximum fire setting and vice versa. This feature is used to

eliminate pulsating or hunting due to an oversensitive application. Increase the Bandwidth

if a pulsating or hunting condition exists for an extended period of time after a Set Point

change. The feature has a range of 5 °F (2.8 °C) to 15 °F (8.3 °C). Total Bandwidth is com-

prehensive to all Set Points.


Offset Temp This feature is used to maintain a desired temperature in an area not being directly sensed

by the [MP2 or MP2+] system. The average difference between the [MP2 or MP2+]

sensed discharged temperature and the desired space temperature must be known. This

is the Offset. The Offset will set the [MP2 or MP2+] sensed discharged air needed to pro-

duce the desired space temperature. Decrease (-) the Offset to maintain and control

space temperature lower than [MP2 or MP2+] discharged temperature. Increase (+) the

Offset to maintain and control space temperature higher than [MP2 or MP2+] discharged

temperature. The space temperature will be displayed as the Process Set Point.


173 of 198

The feature has a range of -10 °F (-5.6 °C) to +10 °F (5.6 °C) and is available for each pro-

cess.

Ramping This feature is used to step the input rate when changing from one Process Set Point to

another. It is available for each Process. The Ramping Rate determines the amount of

temperature change per hour in one-minute steps. It has a range of 60 Deg/hr to 900 Deg/

hr. The change can be positive or negative.

This feature can be used with Max Ramp VDC and Soft Start to smooth the stepping. (Soft

Start only works when Process Temperature increases.)

"Ramp" is displayed to indicate the Ramping feature is active.

Timers The controller features two Timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) that accumulate the hours of

operation for each Process. Each Process has a Timer 1 and a Timer 2. The TM02 is

required.

Timer 1 Timer 1 logs the hours of operation for a Process. It will log up 999 hours at which time it

will automatically reset to zero. The hours can be user reset to zero at any time. It also has

a programmable alarm setting to notify the user (by flashing a character in the lower right

hand corner of the display) when the desired accumulated hours for the Process have

been reached. It has a setting range of 1 to 999 hours. The feature is useful in maintaining

maintenance requirements.

Timer 2 Timer 2 logs the hours of operation for a Process. It will log up 999 hours at which time it

will automatically reset to zero. The hours can be user reset to zero at any time. The fea-

ture is useful in maintaining maintenance requirements.

Example

1. Program Offset to -5° F

2. Program Process Set Point (desired space temperature) to 75° F.

3. Therefore discharge air temperature = 80° F.

(Required [MP2 or MP2+] discharge air temperature to maintain desired space

temperature.)

4. The [MP2 or MP2+] discharged air temp. is 80° F. The displayed Process Set Point

is 75° F.

80° F -5° F 75° F

ExampleProcess 1 = 75° F

Process 2 = 125° F

Process 2 Ramp Rate = 600 Deg/hr or 10 Deg/min

1. The control switches from Process 1 to Process 2.

2. The controller will immediately raise the temperature 10° and will hold it at the new set point.

85 °F (75° F + 10 °F) until 1 minute has passed.

3. It will continue to raise it 10° each subsequent minute until it meets Process 2.

4. It will take 5 steps (10 °F each) and 4 minutes to go from 75 °F to 125 °F.


174 of 198

27.8.1.2 Operation Menu

Max Proc Temp This feature limits the maximum temperature for each Process. It has a range of 60 °F

(15 °C) to 240 °F (115 °C). It does not allow the Process Set Point to be set in excess of

the Maximum Process Temperature setting.


Min Proc Temp This feature limits the minimum temperature for all Processes. It has a range of 60 °F

(15 °C) to 240°F (115 °C). It does not allow any Process Set Point to be set below the Min-

imum Process Temperature setting.


Calibration This feature is used to fine-tune a particular application. Calibration shifts the Bandwidth

range up or down from the factory set mean. Each application is different with variances in

burners and appliances. It can be necessary to change the midpoint of the modulation

range to have the Process Temperature and the actual sensed temperature match.

For sensed temperatures consistently displaying lower than the Set Point, increase (+)

Calibration by number of degrees off. For sensed temperatures consistently displaying

higher than the Set Point, decrease (-) Calibration by number of degrees off. It is available

for each Process and has a range of -10 °F (-5.6 °C) to +10° F (5.6 °C).

Monitor The Monitor feature is a useful tool when setting up or troubleshooting the MP2 system.

The following will appear on the display when Monitor is in the "On" position:


175 of 198

27.8.1.3 Menus

Looping Mode (TM02 applications only)

The looping mode feature is used to select the controllers default position on startup and

after the last process of a program is completed.


NOTE: For MP2+ system, On "Power up" the controller defaults to the last program in use

prior to removal of power. After last manual process of a program or after last timed pro-

cess of a program expires, the controller defaults to the first process of the same program.

F/C Mode This feature sets the control to operate in either the Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius (C) mode.

NOTE: Changing between Fahrenheit and Celsius will reset the control to factory default

settings.


Software Version

Displays the version of software utilized by the controller.

Program Indication Output

See MP2 or MP2+ Select Information

Selecting "READY"Power up:"READY" is displayed. Requires a momentary switch closure

to move the controller to the first process.

After last, manual process of a program:After momentary switch closure to move out of the last process,

controller defaults to the "READY" position.

After last, timed process of a program expires:Controller defaults to the "READY" position.

Selecting "First Process"Power up:Controller begins operating in the First Process of the program.

After last, manual process of a program:After momentary switch closure to move out of the last process,

controller defaults to the First Process.

After last, timed process of a program expires:Controller defaults to the First Process.

Init

ial M

enu

(f

or

MP

2+

syste

m o

nly

) Programs Program Set (1-8), Process Menu, Operation Menu,

Diagnostic Menu

Global Settings Operation Menu, Diagnostic Menu

Pro

cess

Men

u Process Temperatures Temp Set Point Process #(1 - 8)

Off, 60 °F (15 °C) to 240 °F (115 °C)

Process Time

NOTE: TM02 required

Time Process #(1 - 8) ??Hours, Minutes, Seconds

Manual, 00:00:01 to 23:59:59


176 of 198

27.8.1.4 Programming the MP System

Table 45: Programming Buttons

Op

erat

ion

Men

uSoft Start Off, Slow, Medium, Fast

Max Valve VDC 7 to 25 VDC

Max Ramp VDC 5 to 24 VDC

Total Bandwidth 5 °F(2.8 °C) to 15 °F (8.3 °C)

Offset Temp Offset Temp Process #(1 - 8) -10 °F(-5.6 °C) to +

10 °F(5.6 °C)

Ramping Ramping Process #(1 - 8) Off, 60 Deg/hr to 900 Deg/

hr

Timers Timer Process #(1 - 8)

Timer 1 View Hours, Clear Hours, Set Alarm Hours

Set Alarm 0 hrs to 999 hrs

Timer 2 View Hours, Clear Hours

Dia

gn

ost

ic M

enu

Max Proc Temp Max Temp Process #(1 - 8) 60 °F(15 °C) to 240 °F

(115 °C)

Min Proc Temp 60 °F(15 °C) to 240 °F(115 °C)

Calibration Calibration Process #(1 - 8) -10 °F(-5.6 °C) to +

10 °F(5.6 °C)

Monitor On, Off

Looping Mode Ready, First Process

F/C ModeSoftware Version

Buttons DescriptionPress once to initially enter programming mode.

Press once during programming to return to the previous screen.

Press, hold for 5 seconds and release to EXIT programming mode.

Press either to scroll or advance through menus.

Press either to change current value.

Press once to enter into the selected menu or programming mode.

Press once to store programmed setting.

PGM

ENT


177 of 198

Table 46: Screen Indicators

27.8.2 Series MP2 Select User Information

27.8.2.1 Program Indication Output

Terminal #8 is used to indicate the controller is operating within a Program. The following voltage will be

measured across the #8 terminals.

Press and release once to switch to the next Process or to move the controller from the

"READY" position to the First Process.

Press twice or hold for 10 seconds to

abort a timed process.

Display Description**STORED** Will appear on the screen to confirm entry accepted

T Indicates a timed process

M Indicates a manual process

Controller in hte "READY" position 0 VDC

Controller operating in any of the 8 processes making up a Program 24 VDC 2W max


178 of 198

27.8.3 Series MP2+ Select User Information

The initial programming has a maximum of 8 programs available. Each program has a maximum of 8

processes set points. The program and process set point in use is displayed as P(1-8) S#(1-8). Programs

utilize global settings.

On global settings, multiple programmable menu settings common to all programs (global) to speed

programming and insure consistent heater operation, program to program.

Operation Menu Global Settings include Soft Start, Max Valve VDC and Total Bandwidth.

Diagnostic Menu Global Settings include Max Proc Temp, Min Proc Temp, Looping Mode, F/C Mode and

Software Version. NOTE: In Looping Mode On "Power up" the controller defaults to the last program in use

prior to removal of power. After last manual process of a program or after last timed process of a program

expires, the controller defaults to the first process of the same program.

27.8.3.1 Program Indication Output

Terminal #9 is used to indicate the controller is operating within a Program. The following voltage will be

measured across the #9 terminals:

27.8.4 Series MP Programming Guide27.8.4.1 MP2 System

To enter the Process, Operation and Diagnostics Menus Press once.

Table 47: Process Menu Programming

Table 48: Operation Menu programming

Controller in the "READY" position 0 VDC

Controller operating in any of the 8 processes making up a Program 24 VDC 2W max

1 Scroll to the Processes Menu, press .

Process Temperatures2 Scroll to Temperatures, press .

3 Temp Set Point Process #, scroll to Set Point #, press .

4Set Point Temp Process #, XX° F, set Process Temperature value (OFF, 60 °F (15 °C) to 240 °F

(115 °C), press .

5 **Stored** will flash 4 times to confirm entry.

6 Repeat steps 2 - 5 for Set Points #(2-8).

NOTE: Process #1 CAN NOT be OFF. For unused Process Temperature Set Points, press down arrow

until "Off" is displayed. Set Points #(2-8) are factory set to "Off."

Process Times (TM02 required)2 Scroll to Times, press . Each Process can be either Timed or Manual.

3 Time Process #, scroll to Set Point #, press . MANUAL will be the default.

4 Scroll to Seconds, Minutes, or Hours, press .

a. Set Seconds, Minutes or Hours values with , press .

b. **Stored** will flash 4 times to confirm entry.

c. Repeat steps 4 - 4b for each time segment.

d. Default setting or when programmed to 00:00:00.

5 Repeat steps 2 - 4 for Set Points #(2-8)


Soft Start (Global Setting for MP2+ system)

2 Scroll to Soft Start, press .

3 Soft Start, scroll to Off, Slow, Medium or Fast, press .


PGM

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT


179 of 198

Table 49: Diagnostics Menu programming

Max Valve VDC (Global Setting for MP2+ system)

2 Scroll to max valve VDC, press .

3 Max Valve VDC, set voltage value (7 V to 25 V), press .


Max Ramp VDC2 Scroll to Max Ramp VDC, press .

3 Max Ramp VDC, set voltage value (5 V to 24 V), press .

4**Stored** will flash 4 times to confirm entry.

NOTE: Voltage can not be set greater than Max Valve VDC.

Total Bandwidth2 Scroll to Total Bandwidth, press .

3 Total Bandwidth, set Bandwidth (5° F (-2.8 °C) to 15 °F (8.3 °C)), press .

4 **Stored** will flash 4 time to confirm entry.

Offset2 Scroll to Offset Temp, press .

3 Offset Temp Process #, scroll to Set Point #, press .

4 Offset Temp Process #, set Offset (-10° F (-5.6 °C) to 10 °F (5.6 °C)), press .



Ramping2 Scroll to Ramping, press .

3 Ramping Process #, scroll to Set Points #, press .

4 Ramping Process #, set Ramp Rate (Off, 60 to 900 Deg/Hr), press .


6 Repeat steps 2-5 for Set Points #92-8)

Timers (TM02 required)2 Scroll to Timers, press .

3 Timer Process #, scroll to Set Point #, press .

4 Timer Process #, scroll to Timer 1 or Timer 2, press .

5 Timer 1: T1 Proce #, scroll to View Hours, Clear Hours or Set Alarm Hours, press .

View Hours

a. XXX Hours

Clear Hours

b. Are you sure? scroll for Y or N, press .

c. If Y, Timer 1 Hrs Clear flashes to confiirm entry.

Set Alarm Hours

d. T1 Proc # Alarm, scroll to set hrs, press .

e. Set Timer1 Alarm flashes to confirm entry.

6 Timer 2: T2 Proc #, scroll to View Hours or Clear Hours, press .

View Hours

a. XXX hours.

Clear Hours

b. Are you sure? scroll for Y or N, press .

c. If Y, Timer 2 hrs Clear flashes to confirm entry.


ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT


Max Proc Temp (Global Setting for MP2+ system)

2 Scroll to Max Proc Temp, press .

ENT

ENT


180 of 198

27.8.4.2 MP2+ System

Initial Menu programming, press once. Programs appears, press or scroll to Global Settings and

press .

Programs selected:

• Scroll to desired Program #, press .

• After program loads, scroll to Process menu, Operational menu or Diagnostic Menu and press .

• Proceed to selected Menu to continue programming.

Global Settings selected:

• Scroll to Operational menu or Diagnostic Menu, press .

• Process to selected Menu to continue programming.

For Process Menu programming See Page 178, Table 47. For Operation Menu programming, See Page 178, Table 48

For Diagnostic Menu programming, See Page 179, Table 49.

3 Maximum Temp Process #, scrol to Set Points #, press .

4 Max T Proc #, set Temp value (60 °F (15 °C) to 240 °F (115 °C), press .



Min Proc Temp (Global Setting for MP2+ system)

2 Scroll to Min Proc Temp, press .

3 Min Proc Temp, set Temp value (60 °F (15 °C) to 240 °F (115 °C)), press .


Calibration2 Scroll to Calibration, press .

3 calibration Process #, scroll to Set Point #, press .

4 Cal Proc #, set Temp value (-10 °F (-5.6 °C) to 10 °F (5.6 °C)), press .



Monitor2 Scroll to Monitor, press .

3 Monitor, set On or Off, press .

4 Either monitor mode on or Off will flash 3 times to confirm entry.

Looping (Global Setting for MP2+ system)

2 Scroll to Monitor, press .

3 Scroll to READY or FIRST PROCESS, press .


F/C Mode (Global setting for MP2+ system)

2 Scroll to F/C Mode, press .

3 F/C MODE, scroll to either Fahrenheit or Celsius, press .


NOTE: Changing between F and C will cause the MP2 system to reset to factory defaults.

Software Version (Global Setting for MP2+ system)

2 Scroll to Menu Software Version, press .

3 Software Version information will appear.

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

PGM ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT


181 of 198

27.8.5 Series MP Operation27.8.5.1 MP2 Process Control System

27.8.5.2 MP2 Process Control System w/ TM02 Multifunctional Timer ControlSwitching to the Next Programmed Process:

27.8.5.3 MP2+ Multiple Program Processes Temperature Controller

27.8.5.4 MP2+ Multiple Program Process Temperature Controller w/ TM02 Multifunctional Timer Control

Push and release Button 1 on dial face (See Page 176, Table 45 (programming buttons) )

or momentarily latch (make) a set of contacts wired to the TB1 terminal (i.e. typically

accomplished by a momentary ON (normally open) switch) to proceed to the next Pro-

cess. Pushing and releasing Button 1 or momentary latching of TB1 during the last Pro-

cess of a program will cause the MP2 System to return to Process 1. Multiple contacts

used to switch Processes are to be wired in parallel.

Aborting a Process

Same as switching to next Process, push and release Button 1 or momentarily latch TB1.

Timed Processes

Nothing is required. The MP2 system will immediately proceed to the next programmed

process after timing out.

NOTE: If the last Process of a program is timed, it will proceed either to the "READY" posi-

tion or to the First Process. By selecting the First Process in the LOOPING Mode menu,

the MP2 can be programmed into a continuous program loop (See Page 179, Table 49

(diagnostic menu)).

Untimed (Manual) Processes

An untimed Process will remain in the Process indefinitely until Button 1 is pushed and

released or TB1 is momentarily latched. Pushing and releasing Button 1 or the momentary

latching of the TB1 will cause the MP2 System to proceed to the next Process. If the last

Process of a program is untimed, pushing and releasing Button 1 or the momentary latch-

ing of TB1 will cause the MP2 system to proceed to the selected program start position.

Multiple contacts used to switch untimed Processes are to be wired in parallel.

Aborting a Timed Process

Push and release Button 1 or momentarily latch TB1 twice within a 10 second period or

latch and hold continuously for 10 seconds.

Switching to Another Program

Switching to another program can only be accomplished by entering the Initial Program-

ming Menu and selecting "Program Set #".

Switching to Next Programmed Process

Push and release Button 1 on dial face (See Page 176, Table 45 (programming buttons))

or momentarily latch (make) a set of contacts wired to the TB1 terminal (i.e. typically

accomplished by a momentary ON (normally open) switch) to proceed to the next Pro-

cess. Pushing and releasing Button 1 or momentary latching of TB1 during the last Pro-

cess of a program will cause the MP2 System to return to Process 1. Multiple contacts

used to switch Processes are to be wired in parallel.

Aborting a Process

Same as switching to next Process, push and release Button 1 or momentarily latch TB1.

Switching to Another Program

Switching to another program can only be accomplished by entering the Initial Program-

ming Menu and selecting "Program Set #".


182 of 198

27.8.6 Switching to the Next Programmed Process:

Table 50: MP2 and MP2+ Field Service Guide

Timed Processes

Nothing is required. The MP2+ system will immediately proceed to the next programmed

process after timing out.

NOTE: If the last Process of a program is timed, it will proceed either to the "READY" posi-

tion or to the First Process. By selecting the First Process in the LOOPING Mode menu,

the MP2+ can be programmed into a continuous program loop (See Page 179, Table 49

(diagnostic menu)).

Untimed (Manual) Processes

An untimed Process will remain in the Process indefinitely until Button 1 is pushed and

released or TB1 is momentarily latched. Pushing and releasing Button 1 or the momentary

latching of the TB1 will cause the MP2+ System to proceed to the next Process. If the last

Process of a program is untimed, pushing and releasing Button 1 or the momentary latch-

ing of TB1 will cause the MP2+ system to proceed to the selected program start position.

Multiple contacts used to switch untimed Processes are to be wired in parallel.

Aborting a Timed Process

Push and release Button 1 or momentarily latch TB1 twice within a 10 second period or

latch and hold continuously for 10 seconds.

Observed Problem Possible Cause Remedy

A No Gas Flow 1 Modulating valve improperly

installed1 Install with arrow on valve pointing in

direction of gas flow.

BContinuous low fire

(electronic problem)

1Short circuit or no voltage to the

amplifier1

Prove the power source by checking for

24V AC at amplifier

2 Open circuit in TS194(Q) Dis-

charge Air Sensor or wiring.2

Check TS194(Q) for open circuit. See

Temperature Sensor Function of Pre-

liminary Circuit Analysis.

3 Faulty MP2 2

Perform remedy for possible cause 1

and 2 above. If modulating voltages are

still not obtained, MP2 may be

assumed faulty. Replace.

C Continuous low fire

(electronics OK)

1 Short circuit or open circuit in

Modulator Coil. 1

Measure resistance across the modu-

lator terminals with connecting wires

detached. Replace modulator head if

not approximately 45-55 ohms for

M611 Valve, 50-65 ohms for M511

Valve and 60-80 ohms for MR212 and

M411 valve.

2 Plunger missing, jammed or

improperly installed.2

Inspect. Plunger should be smooth,

clean and operate freely in solenoid

sleeve. Clean or replace plunger if nec-

essary. Do not use lubricants of any

type.

D Incorrect low fire, erratic

or pulsating flame

1 Incorrect by-pass metering

adjustment.1 Adjust to proper low fire. See Valve

Adjustments for low fire adjustment.

2 Excessive negative burner pres-

sure.2

Close main gas supply and measure

manifold pressure with blower operat-

ing. Reading should be less than 1.5"

wc negative pressure. If reading is

greater than 1.5" wc negative pressure,

check for clogged filter or other inlet air

restrictions. Consult factory for other

solutions.


183 of 198

EContinuous high fire

(electronic problem)

1Short circuit in TS194(Q) Dis-

charge Air Sensor circuit or wir-

ing.

1Check TS194(Q) for internal short cir-

cuit. See Temperature Sensor Function

of Preliminary Circuit Analysis.

2 Faulty MP2 2

Perform remedy for possible cause 1

and 2 above. If modulating voltages are

still not obtained, MP2 may be

assumed faulty. Replace.

FContinuous high fire

(electronics OK)

1Foreign object holding valve

open.1

Remove bottom plate and inspect valve

and seat.

2 Plunger jammed. 2

Inspect. Plunger should be smooth,

clean and operate freely in solenoid

sleeve. Clean or replace plunger if nec-

essary. Do not use lubricants of any

type.

G Incorrect high fire

1 Inlet pressure too low. 1

Read pressure at inlet to modulating

valve using a manometer with unit

operating at full fire. Pressure should

be equal to the sum of outlet pressure

setting plus pressure drop of the valve.

See Maxitrol's Capacity Chart, M-

MR.MT.EN.

2 Incorrect outlet pressure adjust-

ment of Pressure Regulator.2

Read manifold pressure using manom-

eter and compare with recommenda-

tion of equipment manufacturer. See

Valve Adjustments for high fire adjust-

ment.


184 of 198

Observed Problem Possible Cause Remedy

H

1 Hunting 1

Increase bandwith setting. See Opera-

tion Menu programming in MP2(+)

User's Programming Guide. If flame

stabilizes, reduce bandwith to the mini-

mum setting where a stable flame can

be maintained.

2Erratic air patterns or improper

TS194(Q) location.2

Connect test resistor as described in

step 2 of Preliminary Circuit Analysis.

Set point temperature to process tem-

perature being displayed. If the flame is

steady, the TS194(Q) should be

removed.

3Wiring is run next to high voltage

switching circuits causing

induced voltages.

3

Temporarily wire MP2, TS194(Q) and

modulating gas valve externally and

observe heater/equipment operation. If

smooth operating results, isolate

effected wiring from source of induced

voltage.

4 Faulty amplifier or erratic voltage

supply.4

With DC voltmeter connected (per item

2 above) and locally connected (per

item 3 above), observe DC voltage

across modulator terminals. If erratic or

unstable DC voltages are obtained, the

MP2 may be faulty. Replace. If erratic

operation continues after replacement,

consult Maxitrol Company.

I Incorrect discharge air

temperature

1 Incorrect wiring 1Check wiring diagrams in MP2(+)

Installation Guide and correct if neces-

sary.

2 System out of calibration 2

If sensed temperature (thermometer

next to TS194(Q)) does not correspond

to MP2 setting. See Calibration Proce-

dure in MP2(+) User's/Programming

Guide.

3 Improper TS194(Q) location 3

Is sensed temperature does not repre-

sent average discharge at temperature,

move TS194(Q) to location where aver-

age representative temperature can be

sensed.

J Burned out transformer

1 Short circuit in modulator coil 1

Measure resistance across the modu-

lator terminals with connecting wires

detached. Replace modulator head if

less than 40 ohms.

2 Short circuit between amplifier

and modulator valve.2

Inspect wiring. Correct wiring if short is

found using the wiring diagrams in

MP2(+) Installation Guide.

KProcess temperature

display reads "Low"1

Discharge air temperature too

low.1

Raise discharge air temperature to

greater that 60 °F.


185 of 198

L Control inoperable; Dis-

play reads "Ready…"

1 Bad cable connection between

dial and amplifier.1

Remove power. Disconnect and recon-

nect cable securely. Restore power. If

"Ready…" remains, replace or consult

Maxitrol Company.

2Dial cable disconnected and

reconnected with system pow-

ered.

2Remove and restore power. If

"Ready…" remains, replace or consult

Maxitrol Company.

3 Incorrect cable 3Insure cable type is correct. Replace

with correct cable if necessary.

4 Loss of program. 4Perform remedy for possible cause 1

and 3 above. If "Ready…" remains,

replace or consult Maxitrol Company.

M Control resets

1Momentary switch wiring is run

next to high voltage switching cir-

cuits causing induced voltages.

1

Temporarily wire momentary switch

externally or disconnect external

momentary switch wiring and use inte-

gral switch only. If proper operation

results, isolate effected wiring from

source of induced voltage or use inte-

gral switch only.

2 Momentary loss of power 2Prove the power source by checking for

24V AC at amplifier


186 of 198

27.9 Flame® Safeguard

27.9.1 Fireye® MicroM

FIGURE 117: Fireye® Micro M Service Guide Page 1

LOCKOUTMESSAGE

OPCTRL

INTRLCK PTFI FLAME

LINE FREQUENCY NOISE ● ❍ ❍ ●

FLAME FAIL - PTF1 ❍ ● ● ●

FAULT UNKNOWN ● ● ● ●

AMPLIFIER COUNT FAIL ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

FLAME FAIL MTFI ❍ ❍ ● ●

FALSE FLAME IDLE ❍ ● ❍ ❍

INTRLCK OPEN ● ● ● ❍

INTRLCK CLOSED ❍ ● ● ❍

CHASSIS OPTO ● ● ❍ ●

FLAME FAIL-AUTO ❍ ● ❍ ●

CHECK CHASSIS ❍ ❍ ❍ ●

CHECKPROGRAMMER

❍ ❍ ● ❍

CHECK AMPLIFIER ● ❍ ❍ ❍

AMPLIFIER AUTO CHECK ● ❍ ● ❍

CHECK BLOWN FUSE ● ❍ ● ●

CHECK SCANNER ● ● ❍ ❍


187 of 198

FIGURE 118: Fireye® Micro M Service Guide Page 2

TROU

BLES

HOOT

ING

TIPS

1.Ve

rify

that

ther

e is

a s

olid

ear

th g

roun

d w

ire b

roug

ht to

the

pane

l tha

t the

Fire

ye b

ase

is m

ount

ed to

.2.

In a

rect

ifica

tion

syst

em, v

erify

that

term

inal

S1

is s

olid

ly e

arth

gro

unde

d, a

nd c

onfir

m th

at th

e fla

me

rod

is a

ligne

d so

it d

oesn

’t dr

oop

near

the

igni

tion

spar

k.3.

Confi

rm th

at th

ere

is n

o m

easu

rabl

e vo

ltage

pre

sent

bet

wee

n th

e gr

ound

scr

ew a

nd te

rmin

al 2

(neu

tral).

4.Co

nfirm

that

the

120

volt

AC s

uppl

y ha

s its

neu

tral l

eg e

arth

gro

unde

d at

the

supp

ly, (

float

ing

isol

atio

n tra

nsfo

rmer

s ca

n c

ause

pro

b-le

ms)

.5.

Confi

rm th

at th

e ig

nitio

n tra

nsfo

rmer

’s s

econ

dary

win

ding

is s

olid

ly e

arth

gro

unde

d. T

he g

roun

ding

met

hod

is u

sual

ly th

roug

h th

e tra

nsfo

rmer

cas

e. D

irt, p

aint

, loo

se m

ount

ing

hard

war

e, e

tc.,

can

all b

e fa

ctor

s.6.

Ther

e m

ay b

e a

prob

lem

with

tran

sien

ts in

the

mai

n po

wer

sup

ply.

If y

ou th

ink

this

may

be

the

prob

lem

, you

may

wan

t to

run

a gr

ound

w

ire d

irect

ly fr

om th

e pi

lot a

ssem

bly

back

to th

e el

ectri

cal p

anel

whe

re th

e Fi

reye

con

trol i

s m

ount

ed.

Mic

roM

Fus

e

10 a

mps

Fire

ye P

art N

umbe

r: 23

-197

o

rW

ickm

ann

Part

Num

ber:

378-

2100

-0-4

1(o

r Wic

kman

n ol

der P

art N

umbe

r: 19

373-

071-

K)


188 of 198

27.9.2 Fireye® M4RT1

The Fireye® M4RT1 is a self contained version of the

MicroM flame safeguard. It is only used on flame rod

applications and does not have separate

programming boards or flame signal amplifiers. Refer

to Page 186, and Page 187, Figure 117 and Figure 118 and use the same service guide that the MicroM

uses, except ignore the sections concerning

replacing programming and amplifier boards, but

instead where ever replacement is needed, the entire

flame safeguard must be replaced.

27.9.3 Honeywell RM7897

Run/Test Switch

The Run/Test Switch is located on the top side of the

relay module. The Run/Test Switch allows the burner

sequence to be altered as follows:

• In the measured PREPURGE sequence, the Run/

Test Switch, placed in the TEST position, causes

the PREPURGE timing to stop.

• In the Pilot Flame Establishing Period, the Run/

Test Switch, placed in the TEST position, stops

the timer during the first eight seconds of a ten-

second PFEP selection. It also allows for pilot

turn-down test and other burner adjustments. This

activates a fifteen-second flameout timer that

permits pilot flame adjustment without nuisance

safety shutdowns.

IMPORTANT

When the relay module is switched to the TEST

mode, it stops and holds at the next Run/Test Switch

point in the operating sequence. Make sure that the

Run/Test Switch is in the RUN position before leaving

the installation.

The POWER LED provides fault identification when

the flame safeguard control locks out on an alarm.

Fault identification is a series of fast- and slow-

blinking LED lights. The fast blinks identify the tens

portion of the fault code (three fast blinks is 30), while

the slow blinks identify the units portion of the fault

code (two slow blinks is 2). Three fast blinks followed

by two slow blinks would be fault code 32. This

identifies a running interlock on during STANDBY.

The LED code repeats as long as the fault exists. To

clear the fault, press the RESET button, (See Page 188, Table 51 for Blinking Fault Code List.).

Table 51: Honeywell Blinking Fault Code ListFault Code System Failure Recommended TroubleshootingCode 1-1

*Low AC Line

Voltage*

Low AC Line detected. 1. Check the relay module and display module connections.

2. Reset and sequence the Relay Module.

3. Check the 7800 power supply and make sure that frequency and voltage meet specifications.

4. Check the backup power supply, as appropriate.Code 1-2

*AC Quality

Problem*

Excessive noise or

device running on slow,

fast, or AC line dropout

detected.

Code 2-1

*Unexpected

Flame Signal*

Flame sensed when no

flame is expected during

STANDBY or PURGE.

1. Check that flame is not present in the combustion chamber; correct any errors.

2. Make sure that the flame amplifier and flame detector are compatible.

3. Check the wiring and correct any errors.

4. Remove the flame amplifier and inspect its connections. Reseat the amplifier.

5. Reset and sequence the relay module.

6. If the code reappears, replace the flame amplifier and/or the flame detector.

7. If the fault persists, replace the relay module.

Code 2-2

*Flame Signal

Absent*

No-flame time present

at the end of the PIlot

Flame Establishing

Period; lost during the

Main Flame Establishing

Period or during RUN.

1. Measure the flame signal. If one exists, verify that it meets specifications.

2. Make sure that the flame amplifier and flame detector are compatible.

3. Inspect the main fuel valve(s) and valve connection(s).

4. Verify that the fuel pressure is sufficient to supply fuel to the combustion chamber. Inspect the

connections to the fuel pressure switches. Make sure they are functioning properly.

5. Inspect the Airflow Switch and make sure that it is functioning properly.

6. Check the flame detector sighting position; reset and recycle. Measure the flame signal

strength. Verify that it meets specifications. If not, refer to the flame detector and/or flame

amplifier checkout procedures in the installation instructions.

7. Replace the flame amplifier and/or the flame detector, if necessary.


Code 2-3

*Flame Signal

Overrange*

Flame signal value is

too high to be valid.

1. Make sure the flame detector and flame amplifier are compatible.

2. Remove the flame amplifier and inspect its connections. Reset the flame amplifier.


4. Check the flame detector sighting position; reset and recycle. Measure flame strength. Verify

that it meets specifications. If not, refer to the flame detectorand/or flame amplifier checkout

procedures in the installation instructions.




189 of 198

Code 3-1

*Running/

Interlock Switch

Problem*

Running or Lockout

Interlock fault during

Prepurge.

1. Check wiring; correct any errors.

2. Inspect the fan; make sure there is no air intake blockage and that it is supplying air.

3. Make sure the Lockout Interlock switches are functioning properly and the contacts are free

from contaminants.

4. Reset and sequence the relay module to Prepurge (place the TEST/RUN Switch in the TEST

position, if available). Measure the voltage between terminal 7 and G (ground); 120 Vac

should be present. Switch TEST/RUN back to RUN.

5. If steps 1 through 4 are correct and the fault persists, replace the relay module.

Code 3-2

*Running/

Interlock On

During

Standby*

Lockout Interlock

powered at improper

point in sequence or On

in Standby.

1. Check wiring to make sure that the Lockout Interlocks are connected properlybetween termi-

nals 6 and 7. Correct any errors.


3. If the fault persists, measure the voltage between terminal 6 and G (ground),then between ter-

minal 7 and G. If there is 120 Vac at terminal 6 when the controller is off, the controller switch

may be bad or is jumpered.

4. If steps 1 through 3 are correct and there is 120 Vac at terminal 7 when the controller is closed

and the fault persists, check for a welded or jumpered Running Interlock or Airflow Switch. Cor-

rect any errors.

5. If steps 1 through 4 are correct and the fault persists, replace the relay module.

Code 3-3

*VPS in

Improper State*

VPS (Valve Proving

Switch) in wrong state

during VPS Test.

1. Check wiring, making sure upstream valve is connected to terminal 9 and downstream valve is

connected to terminal 17.

2. Conduct Valve Seat leakage test using a manometer.

3. Reset and sequence the relay module; if fault repeats, test VPS (connected to terminal 16) is

functioning properly; replace if necessary.


5. If fault persists, replace the relay module.

Code 4-1

*Purge Card

Problem*

No purge card or the

purge card timing has

changed from the

original configuration.

1. Make sure the purge card is seated properly.

2. Inspect the purge card and the connector on the relay module for any damage or contami-

nants.


4. If the fault code reappears, replace the purge card.


6. If the fault code persists, replace the relay module.

Code 4-2

*Wiring

Problem/

Internal Fault*

Pilot (ignition) valve

terminal, main valve,

ignition or Main Valve 2

was on when it should

be off. Electrical Shock Hazard; Fire or Explosion Hazard.Can cause severe injury, death or property damage.Remove system power and turn off power supply.

1. Remove system power and turn off fuel supply.


3. inspect Pilot Fuel Valve(s), both places, and connections.



Code 4-3

*Flame

Amplifier

Problem*

Flame not sensed, or

sensed when it should

be on or off.


2. Make sure the flame amplifier and flame detector are compatible.

3. Remove the flame amplifier and inspect the connections. Reseat the amplifier.




Code 4-4

*Configuration

Jumper Problem*

The configuration

jumpers differ from the

sample taken at startup.

1. Inspect the jumper connections. Make sure the clipped jumpers were completely removed.



Code 5-1

*Preignition

Interlock*

Preignition Interlock

fault.

1. Check wiring and correct any errors.

2. Check Preignition Interlock switches to assure proper functioning.

3. Check fuel valve operation.

4. Reset and sequence the relay module; monitor the Preignition Interlock status.


Code 5-2

*High Fire Sw.

or Low Fire

Sw.*

Either High Fire Switch

or Low Fire Switch

failure.



3. Use manual motor potentiometer to drive the motor open and closed. Verify at motor switch

that the end switches are operating properly. Use RUN/TEST switch if manual potentiometer is

not available.




190 of 198

Code 5-3

*Man-Open Sw.; Start

Sw. or Control On*

Man-Open Switch, Start

Switch or Control On in

the wrong operational

state.


2. Make sure that the Manual Open Valve Switch, Start Switch and Control are operating properly.

3. Stat Switch held .On. too long.


5. Reset and sequence the relay module. If the fault persists, replace the relay module

(RM7838A1014; RM7838B1013 or RM7838C1004 only).

Code 6-1

*Internal Faults*

Relay Module self-test

failure.


2. If fault reappears, remove power from the device, reapply power, then reset and sequence the

relay module.


Code 6-2

*Internal Faults*

Relay Module Self-Test

failure.



relay module.

3. If fault does not repeat on the next cycle, check for electrical noise being copied into the relay

module through the external loads or possibly an electrical grounding issue.


Code 6-3

*Device

Specific*

Fault with special OEM

input circuits.

1. Check wiring and operation of special OEM inputs.



relay module.

4. If the fault does not repeat on the next cycle, check for electrical noise being copied into the

relay module through the external loads or possibly an electrical grounding issue.


Code 6-4

*Accessory

Fault*

Unused at this time. —

Code 7-7

*Unused*

Unused at this time. —


191 of 198

27.10 WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series Start-Up Procedure


192 of 198


193 of 198

YES NO

27

28

29`

30

D.C. Volts Flame rod: 6 - 18 VD.C. U.V. Scanner: 4 - 5.5 VD.C

31

32

Record Pressure Drop Inches W.C. - Range is .50" W.C. ± .1"

33

34 Record the inlet gas pressure while the unit is on high fire Inches W.C.

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

SERIES MP2 - Consult Section 24.8.1 or 24.8.2.

SERIES 94 - Consult Section 24.7.1.

Check for stable, clean burning flame (brilliant blue with short yellow finger tips) that remains the same throughout the entire range of burner modulation.

Turn down the high limit setting to 130 and see if the burner trips out. After the high limit trips out, turn the high limit set point back

SERIES 94 and SERIES MP2 - To set up the high fire, see Sections 21.4.2.2 and 21.5.


to 160 and reset high limit.

Adjust the airflow switch and/or optional clogged filter switch in the air make-up unit. If the unit has a bake or dry cycle, adjustment of theof the airflow switch should be done in this cycle:

(NOTE: The minimum gas pressure must be at least the value listed on the unit serial tag. If this requirement is not met, the unit will not achieve the design temperature rise. (Failure to meet this pressure will affect the performance warranty.)


Adjust low fire.SERIES 14 and SERIES 44 - To set up the low fire, see Sections 21.4.2.1 and 21.5.

Open main shut off valve; visually inspect the burner to make sure it is not over firing.

SERIES 14 and SERIES 44 - To set up the high fire, see Sections 21.4.2.1 and 21.5.

SERIES 94 and SERIES MP2 - To set up the high fire, see Sections 21.4.2.2 and 21.5.

Turn the airflow adjustment screw (clockwise) until the burner circuit shuts off for the supply airflow switch, opposite for the volume airflow switch.

For the supply airflow switch slowly back out the airflow adjustment screw (counter-clockwise) until the burner circuit comes back on steady. Now back out the adjustment screw another three full turns (counter-clockwise). The volume airflow switch is opposite.

Calibrate the Maxitrol dial to match the discharge temperature:

Note ambient air temperature, with the unit running in the "no heat" mode. Ambient air temperature: __________ deg. F

Start the burner. Move the selector switch to "Winter" or "Heat"

After pilot lights, check Fireye flame signal. Read and record the D.C. voltage. Do a visual inspection of the pilot flame and make any adjustments if needed.

START-UP "HEAT"

Adjust the temperature rise to match the serial tag temperature rise, following the instructions for the proper series Maxitrol system you may have on the air handler:

Check to see that only the pilot shut off valve is open. Reset the optional low gas pressure switch if the unit is equipped with it.

Measure and record the pressure drop across the burner: If the unit has adjustable profile plates, connect a pressure gauge across test ports.


194 of 198

42

YES NO

If no, explain:

If no, explain:

If no, explain:

If no, explain:

If no, explain:

If no, explain:

43

If no, explain:

If no, explain:

44

If no, explain:

If no, explain:

Date Date

Operation of the temperature control in the dry cycle? (if applicable)

Personnel Training Review:

Proper maintenance and replacement of filters?

Location and operation of safety devices and location of reset buttons?

The customer knows where to purchase replacement filters and service parts?

Open Items Responsible Party Expected Completion Date

Maintenance:

The customer has been made aware of the equipment warranty?

Customer Signature

Operation of the balancing gauge to maintain positive pressure?

Location and operation of safety disconnect switch? (Use lockout/tag out procedures)

The above start-Up checklist has been completely and accurately filled out and reviewed with the customer

Name and position of individuals trained:Name: Position:

Documentation:The customer has a copy of the operations and maintenance manual?

The customer has a copy of this Start-Up checklist?

Operation of the temperature control? (Including "heat" minimum temp. rise?)

The following items should be completed during final walk through with the customer.

It is important that everyone concerned with the operation and maintenance of the equipment be trained in the safety procedures contained in the operation and maintenance manuals. Has everyone been trained on:

Factory Representative

SECTION 28: THE WEATHER-RITE™ TT-SERIES WARRANTY

195 of 198

SECTION 28: THE WEATHER-RITE™ TT-SERIES WARRANTYWEATHER-RITE LLC WILL PAY FOR:Within 24 months from date of purchase by buyer or 27 months from date of shipment by Weather-Rite LLC (whichever occurs first), replacement parts will be provided free of charge for any part of the product which fails due to a manufacturing or material defect.

Weather-Rite LLC will require the part in question to be returned to the factory. Weather-Rite LLC will, at its sole discretion, repair or replace after determining the nature of the defect and disposition of part in question.

WEATHER-RITE™ Replacement Parts are warranted for the later of 12 months from date of shipment from Weather-Rite LLC or the remaining WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series warranty.

WEATHER-RITE LLC WILL NOT PAY FOR:Service trips, service calls and labor charges.

Shipment of replacement parts.

Claims where the total price of the goods have not been paid.

Damage due to:

• Improper installation, operation or maintenance.

• Misuse, abuse, neglect, or modification of the

WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series in any way.

• Use of the WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series for other

than its intended purpose.

• Incorrect gas or electrical supply, accident, fire,

floods, acts of God, war, terrorism, or other casualty.

• Improper service, use of replacement parts or

accessories not specified by Weather-Rite LLC.

• Failure to install or maintain the

WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series as directed in the

Installation, Operation and Service Manual.

• Relocation of the WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series after

initial installation

• Use of the WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series in a

corrosive atmosphere containing contaminants.

• Use of the WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series in the

vicinity of a combustible or explosive material.

• Any defect in the WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series

arising from a drawing, design, or specification

supplied by or on behalf of the consumer.

• Damage incurred during shipment. Claim must be

filed with carrier.

WARRANTY IS VOID IF:The WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series is not installed by an contractor qualified in the installation and service of gas fired heating equipment.

You cannot prove original purchase date and required annual maintenance history.

The data plate and/or serial number are removed, defaced, modified or altered in any way.

The ownership of the WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series is moved or transferred. This warranty is non-transferable.

Weather-Rite LLC is not permitted to inspect the damaged equipment and/or component parts.

READ YOUR INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL.If you have questions about your equipment, contact your installing professional. Should you need Replacement Parts or have additional questions, call or write:

Weather-Rite LLC

616 North 5th Street

Minneapolis, MN 55401-1236

Telephone: +1.612.338.1401

Fax: +1.612.338.6783

Toll Free: 800.589.3691


Weather-Rite LLC's liability, and your exclusive remedy, under this warranty or any implied warranty (including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose) is limited to providing replacement parts during the term of this warranty. Some jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. There are no rights, warranties or conditions, expressed or implied, statutory or otherwise, other than those contained in this warranty.

Weather-Rite LLC shall in no event be responsible for incidental or consequential damages or incur liability for damages in excess of the amount paid by you for the WEATHER-RITE™ TT-Series. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so this limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

Weather-Rite LLC shall not be responsible for failure to perform under the terms of this warranty if caused by circumstances out of its control, including but not limited to war, fire, flood, strike, government or court orders, acts of God, terrorism, unavailability of supplies, parts or power. No person is authorized to assume for Weather-Rite LLC any other warranty, obligation or liability.

LIMITATIONS ON AUTHORITY OF REPRESENTATIVES:No representative of Weather-Rite LLC, other than an Executive Officer, has authority to change or extend these provisions. Changes or extensions shall be binding only if confirmed in writing by Weather-Rite LLC's duly authorized Executive Officer.


196 of 198


197 of 198

8 Specified Air Solutions


198 of 198


199 of 198

WARNING

Read the Installation, Operation and Service Manual thoroughly before installation, operation or service.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Stop! Read all safety instructions on this information sheet.

2. Open the manual gas valve in the air handler supply line.

3. Turn on electric to the air handler.

4. Set temperature selector and, if equipped, thermostat, to desired

setting.

5. Set FAN switch to “ON”.

6. Set BURNER switch to “ON”.

1. Stop! Read all safety instructions on this information sheet.

2. Turn on electric to the air handler.

3. Set FAN switch to “ON”.

1. If equipped, set the thermostat to the lowest setting.

2. Set BURNER switch to “OFF”.

3. Set FAN switch to “OFF”.

1. If equipped, set the thermostat to the lowest setting.

2. Set BURNER switch to “OFF”.

3. Set FAN switch to “OFF”.

4. Turn off electric to the air handler.

5. Close the manual gas valve in the air handler supply line.

6. Call your registered contractor qualified in the installation and service

of gas-fired heating equipment.

Fire Hazard

Keep all flammable objects, liquids and vapors the

required clearances to combustibles away from

equipment.

Some objects can catch fire or explode when placed

close to equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in

death, injury or property damage.

Installation Code and Annual Inspections: All installation and service of WEATHER-RITE™ equipment must be performed by a contractor qualified in the installation and service of equipment sold and supplied by Weather-Rite LLC and conform to all requirements set forth in the WEATHER-RITE™ manuals and all applicable governmental authorities pertaining to the installation, service, operation and labeling of the equipment. To help facilitate optimum performance and safety, Weather-Rite LLC recommends that a qualified contractor conduct, at a minimum, annual inspections of your WEATHER-RITE™ equipment and perform service where necessary, using only replacement parts sold and supplied by Weather-Rite LLC.

Air handlers are approved for installation up to 2000' (610 m).For installations at elevations above 2000' (610 m), consult factory.

Further Information: Applications, engineering and detailed guidance on systems design, installation and equipment performance is available through WEATHER-RITE™ representatives. Please contact us for any further information you may require, including the Installation, Operation and Service Manual.

These products are not for residential use.

© 2017 Weather-Rite LLC All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyrights herein may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means – graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems – without written permission of Weather-Rite LLC.

Weather-Rite LLC1100 Seven Mile Road NWComstock Park, MI 49321Telephone: +1.612.338.1401Fax: +1.6167840435Toll Free: 800.589.3691

CLEARANCES TO COMBUSTIBLES

Clearances to combustibles for Models XT112 - XT130 are

12" (30.5 cm) on the control enclosure side and 6" (15.2 cm) on all

other surfaces.

Clearances to combustibles for models XT225 and XT230 are 6"

(15.2 cm) on all surfaces.

Clearances to combustibles do not denote clearances for

accessibility. Minimum clearance for access is 48" (122 cm) on all

models. Minimum clearance for accessibility applies to the control

enclosure, blower access panel and filter access panel

(when equipped).

TO OPERATE AS VENTILATOR

TO TURN OFF THE AIR HANDLER

IF THE AIR HANDLER WILL NOT OPERATE,FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS, TO HELPENSURE YOUR SAFETY

www.weather-rite.com Printed in U.S.A. P/N 91040117 Rev C

Attach this information to the wall near the WEATHER-RITE™ remote panel or equipment controls.


200 of 198


201 of 198

WR161100NA Weather-Rite TT Manual .book

Documents

Transcript of WR161100NA Weather-Rite TT Manual .book